1 /* vi:set ts=8 sts=4 sw=4: 2 * 3 * VIM - Vi IMproved by Bram Moolenaar 4 * 5 * Do ":help uganda" in Vim to read copying and usage conditions. 6 * Do ":help credits" in Vim to see a list of people who contributed. 7 * See README.txt for an overview of the Vim source code. 8 */ 9 10 /* 11 * misc1.c: functions that didn't seem to fit elsewhere 12 */ 13 14 #include "vim.h" 15 #include "version.h" 16 17 #ifdef HAVE_FCNTL_H 18 # include <fcntl.h> /* for chdir() */ 19 #endif 20 21 static char_u *vim_version_dir __ARGS((char_u *vimdir)); 22 static char_u *remove_tail __ARGS((char_u *p, char_u *pend, char_u *name)); 23 static int copy_indent __ARGS((int size, char_u *src)); 24 25 /* 26 * Count the size (in window cells) of the indent in the current line. 27 */ 28 int 29 get_indent() 30 { 31 return get_indent_str(ml_get_curline(), (int)curbuf->b_p_ts); 32 } 33 34 /* 35 * Count the size (in window cells) of the indent in line "lnum". 36 */ 37 int 38 get_indent_lnum(lnum) 39 linenr_T lnum; 40 { 41 return get_indent_str(ml_get(lnum), (int)curbuf->b_p_ts); 42 } 43 44 #if defined(FEAT_FOLDING) || defined(PROTO) 45 /* 46 * Count the size (in window cells) of the indent in line "lnum" of buffer 47 * "buf". 48 */ 49 int 50 get_indent_buf(buf, lnum) 51 buf_T *buf; 52 linenr_T lnum; 53 { 54 return get_indent_str(ml_get_buf(buf, lnum, FALSE), (int)buf->b_p_ts); 55 } 56 #endif 57 58 /* 59 * count the size (in window cells) of the indent in line "ptr", with 60 * 'tabstop' at "ts" 61 */ 62 int 63 get_indent_str(ptr, ts) 64 char_u *ptr; 65 int ts; 66 { 67 int count = 0; 68 69 for ( ; *ptr; ++ptr) 70 { 71 if (*ptr == TAB) /* count a tab for what it is worth */ 72 count += ts - (count % ts); 73 else if (*ptr == ' ') 74 ++count; /* count a space for one */ 75 else 76 break; 77 } 78 return count; 79 } 80 81 /* 82 * Set the indent of the current line. 83 * Leaves the cursor on the first non-blank in the line. 84 * Caller must take care of undo. 85 * "flags": 86 * SIN_CHANGED: call changed_bytes() if the line was changed. 87 * SIN_INSERT: insert the indent in front of the line. 88 * SIN_UNDO: save line for undo before changing it. 89 * Returns TRUE if the line was changed. 90 */ 91 int 92 set_indent(size, flags) 93 int size; 94 int flags; 95 { 96 char_u *p; 97 char_u *newline; 98 char_u *oldline; 99 char_u *s; 100 int todo; 101 int ind_len; 102 int line_len; 103 int doit = FALSE; 104 int ind_done; 105 int tab_pad; 106 int retval = FALSE; 107 108 /* 109 * First check if there is anything to do and compute the number of 110 * characters needed for the indent. 111 */ 112 todo = size; 113 ind_len = 0; 114 p = oldline = ml_get_curline(); 115 116 /* Calculate the buffer size for the new indent, and check to see if it 117 * isn't already set */ 118 119 /* if 'expandtab' isn't set: use TABs */ 120 if (!curbuf->b_p_et) 121 { 122 /* If 'preserveindent' is set then reuse as much as possible of 123 * the existing indent structure for the new indent */ 124 if (!(flags & SIN_INSERT) && curbuf->b_p_pi) 125 { 126 ind_done = 0; 127 128 /* count as many characters as we can use */ 129 while (todo > 0 && vim_iswhite(*p)) 130 { 131 if (*p == TAB) 132 { 133 tab_pad = (int)curbuf->b_p_ts 134 - (ind_done % (int)curbuf->b_p_ts); 135 /* stop if this tab will overshoot the target */ 136 if (todo < tab_pad) 137 break; 138 todo -= tab_pad; 139 ++ind_len; 140 ind_done += tab_pad; 141 } 142 else 143 { 144 --todo; 145 ++ind_len; 146 ++ind_done; 147 } 148 ++p; 149 } 150 151 /* Fill to next tabstop with a tab, if possible */ 152 tab_pad = (int)curbuf->b_p_ts - (ind_done % (int)curbuf->b_p_ts); 153 if (todo >= tab_pad) 154 { 155 doit = TRUE; 156 todo -= tab_pad; 157 ++ind_len; 158 /* ind_done += tab_pad; */ 159 } 160 } 161 162 /* count tabs required for indent */ 163 while (todo >= (int)curbuf->b_p_ts) 164 { 165 if (*p != TAB) 166 doit = TRUE; 167 else 168 ++p; 169 todo -= (int)curbuf->b_p_ts; 170 ++ind_len; 171 /* ind_done += (int)curbuf->b_p_ts; */ 172 } 173 } 174 /* count spaces required for indent */ 175 while (todo > 0) 176 { 177 if (*p != ' ') 178 doit = TRUE; 179 else 180 ++p; 181 --todo; 182 ++ind_len; 183 /* ++ind_done; */ 184 } 185 186 /* Return if the indent is OK already. */ 187 if (!doit && !vim_iswhite(*p) && !(flags & SIN_INSERT)) 188 return FALSE; 189 190 /* Allocate memory for the new line. */ 191 if (flags & SIN_INSERT) 192 p = oldline; 193 else 194 p = skipwhite(p); 195 line_len = (int)STRLEN(p) + 1; 196 newline = alloc(ind_len + line_len); 197 if (newline == NULL) 198 return FALSE; 199 200 /* Put the characters in the new line. */ 201 s = newline; 202 todo = size; 203 /* if 'expandtab' isn't set: use TABs */ 204 if (!curbuf->b_p_et) 205 { 206 /* If 'preserveindent' is set then reuse as much as possible of 207 * the existing indent structure for the new indent */ 208 if (!(flags & SIN_INSERT) && curbuf->b_p_pi) 209 { 210 p = oldline; 211 ind_done = 0; 212 213 while (todo > 0 && vim_iswhite(*p)) 214 { 215 if (*p == TAB) 216 { 217 tab_pad = (int)curbuf->b_p_ts 218 - (ind_done % (int)curbuf->b_p_ts); 219 /* stop if this tab will overshoot the target */ 220 if (todo < tab_pad) 221 break; 222 todo -= tab_pad; 223 ind_done += tab_pad; 224 } 225 else 226 { 227 --todo; 228 ++ind_done; 229 } 230 *s++ = *p++; 231 } 232 233 /* Fill to next tabstop with a tab, if possible */ 234 tab_pad = (int)curbuf->b_p_ts - (ind_done % (int)curbuf->b_p_ts); 235 if (todo >= tab_pad) 236 { 237 *s++ = TAB; 238 todo -= tab_pad; 239 } 240 241 p = skipwhite(p); 242 } 243 244 while (todo >= (int)curbuf->b_p_ts) 245 { 246 *s++ = TAB; 247 todo -= (int)curbuf->b_p_ts; 248 } 249 } 250 while (todo > 0) 251 { 252 *s++ = ' '; 253 --todo; 254 } 255 mch_memmove(s, p, (size_t)line_len); 256 257 /* Replace the line (unless undo fails). */ 258 if (!(flags & SIN_UNDO) || u_savesub(curwin->w_cursor.lnum) == OK) 259 { 260 ml_replace(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, newline, FALSE); 261 if (flags & SIN_CHANGED) 262 changed_bytes(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, 0); 263 /* Correct saved cursor position if it's after the indent. */ 264 if (saved_cursor.lnum == curwin->w_cursor.lnum 265 && saved_cursor.col >= (colnr_T)(p - oldline)) 266 saved_cursor.col += ind_len - (colnr_T)(p - oldline); 267 retval = TRUE; 268 } 269 else 270 vim_free(newline); 271 272 curwin->w_cursor.col = ind_len; 273 return retval; 274 } 275 276 /* 277 * Copy the indent from ptr to the current line (and fill to size) 278 * Leaves the cursor on the first non-blank in the line. 279 * Returns TRUE if the line was changed. 280 */ 281 static int 282 copy_indent(size, src) 283 int size; 284 char_u *src; 285 { 286 char_u *p = NULL; 287 char_u *line = NULL; 288 char_u *s; 289 int todo; 290 int ind_len; 291 int line_len = 0; 292 int tab_pad; 293 int ind_done; 294 int round; 295 296 /* Round 1: compute the number of characters needed for the indent 297 * Round 2: copy the characters. */ 298 for (round = 1; round <= 2; ++round) 299 { 300 todo = size; 301 ind_len = 0; 302 ind_done = 0; 303 s = src; 304 305 /* Count/copy the usable portion of the source line */ 306 while (todo > 0 && vim_iswhite(*s)) 307 { 308 if (*s == TAB) 309 { 310 tab_pad = (int)curbuf->b_p_ts 311 - (ind_done % (int)curbuf->b_p_ts); 312 /* Stop if this tab will overshoot the target */ 313 if (todo < tab_pad) 314 break; 315 todo -= tab_pad; 316 ind_done += tab_pad; 317 } 318 else 319 { 320 --todo; 321 ++ind_done; 322 } 323 ++ind_len; 324 if (p != NULL) 325 *p++ = *s; 326 ++s; 327 } 328 329 /* Fill to next tabstop with a tab, if possible */ 330 tab_pad = (int)curbuf->b_p_ts - (ind_done % (int)curbuf->b_p_ts); 331 if (todo >= tab_pad) 332 { 333 todo -= tab_pad; 334 ++ind_len; 335 if (p != NULL) 336 *p++ = TAB; 337 } 338 339 /* Add tabs required for indent */ 340 while (todo >= (int)curbuf->b_p_ts) 341 { 342 todo -= (int)curbuf->b_p_ts; 343 ++ind_len; 344 if (p != NULL) 345 *p++ = TAB; 346 } 347 348 /* Count/add spaces required for indent */ 349 while (todo > 0) 350 { 351 --todo; 352 ++ind_len; 353 if (p != NULL) 354 *p++ = ' '; 355 } 356 357 if (p == NULL) 358 { 359 /* Allocate memory for the result: the copied indent, new indent 360 * and the rest of the line. */ 361 line_len = (int)STRLEN(ml_get_curline()) + 1; 362 line = alloc(ind_len + line_len); 363 if (line == NULL) 364 return FALSE; 365 p = line; 366 } 367 } 368 369 /* Append the original line */ 370 mch_memmove(p, ml_get_curline(), (size_t)line_len); 371 372 /* Replace the line */ 373 ml_replace(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, line, FALSE); 374 375 /* Put the cursor after the indent. */ 376 curwin->w_cursor.col = ind_len; 377 return TRUE; 378 } 379 380 /* 381 * Return the indent of the current line after a number. Return -1 if no 382 * number was found. Used for 'n' in 'formatoptions': numbered list. 383 * Since a pattern is used it can actually handle more than numbers. 384 */ 385 int 386 get_number_indent(lnum) 387 linenr_T lnum; 388 { 389 colnr_T col; 390 pos_T pos; 391 regmmatch_T regmatch; 392 393 if (lnum > curbuf->b_ml.ml_line_count) 394 return -1; 395 pos.lnum = 0; 396 regmatch.regprog = vim_regcomp(curbuf->b_p_flp, RE_MAGIC); 397 if (regmatch.regprog != NULL) 398 { 399 regmatch.rmm_ic = FALSE; 400 regmatch.rmm_maxcol = 0; 401 if (vim_regexec_multi(®match, curwin, curbuf, lnum, (colnr_T)0)) 402 { 403 pos.lnum = regmatch.endpos[0].lnum + lnum; 404 pos.col = regmatch.endpos[0].col; 405 #ifdef FEAT_VIRTUALEDIT 406 pos.coladd = 0; 407 #endif 408 } 409 vim_free(regmatch.regprog); 410 } 411 412 if (pos.lnum == 0 || *ml_get_pos(&pos) == NUL) 413 return -1; 414 getvcol(curwin, &pos, &col, NULL, NULL); 415 return (int)col; 416 } 417 418 #if defined(FEAT_CINDENT) || defined(FEAT_SMARTINDENT) 419 420 static int cin_is_cinword __ARGS((char_u *line)); 421 422 /* 423 * Return TRUE if the string "line" starts with a word from 'cinwords'. 424 */ 425 static int 426 cin_is_cinword(line) 427 char_u *line; 428 { 429 char_u *cinw; 430 char_u *cinw_buf; 431 int cinw_len; 432 int retval = FALSE; 433 int len; 434 435 cinw_len = (int)STRLEN(curbuf->b_p_cinw) + 1; 436 cinw_buf = alloc((unsigned)cinw_len); 437 if (cinw_buf != NULL) 438 { 439 line = skipwhite(line); 440 for (cinw = curbuf->b_p_cinw; *cinw; ) 441 { 442 len = copy_option_part(&cinw, cinw_buf, cinw_len, ","); 443 if (STRNCMP(line, cinw_buf, len) == 0 444 && (!vim_iswordc(line[len]) || !vim_iswordc(line[len - 1]))) 445 { 446 retval = TRUE; 447 break; 448 } 449 } 450 vim_free(cinw_buf); 451 } 452 return retval; 453 } 454 #endif 455 456 /* 457 * open_line: Add a new line below or above the current line. 458 * 459 * For VREPLACE mode, we only add a new line when we get to the end of the 460 * file, otherwise we just start replacing the next line. 461 * 462 * Caller must take care of undo. Since VREPLACE may affect any number of 463 * lines however, it may call u_save_cursor() again when starting to change a 464 * new line. 465 * "flags": OPENLINE_DELSPACES delete spaces after cursor 466 * OPENLINE_DO_COM format comments 467 * OPENLINE_KEEPTRAIL keep trailing spaces 468 * OPENLINE_MARKFIX adjust mark positions after the line break 469 * 470 * Return TRUE for success, FALSE for failure 471 */ 472 int 473 open_line(dir, flags, old_indent) 474 int dir; /* FORWARD or BACKWARD */ 475 int flags; 476 int old_indent; /* indent for after ^^D in Insert mode */ 477 { 478 char_u *saved_line; /* copy of the original line */ 479 char_u *next_line = NULL; /* copy of the next line */ 480 char_u *p_extra = NULL; /* what goes to next line */ 481 int less_cols = 0; /* less columns for mark in new line */ 482 int less_cols_off = 0; /* columns to skip for mark adjust */ 483 pos_T old_cursor; /* old cursor position */ 484 int newcol = 0; /* new cursor column */ 485 int newindent = 0; /* auto-indent of the new line */ 486 int n; 487 int trunc_line = FALSE; /* truncate current line afterwards */ 488 int retval = FALSE; /* return value, default is FAIL */ 489 #ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS 490 int extra_len = 0; /* length of p_extra string */ 491 int lead_len; /* length of comment leader */ 492 char_u *lead_flags; /* position in 'comments' for comment leader */ 493 char_u *leader = NULL; /* copy of comment leader */ 494 #endif 495 char_u *allocated = NULL; /* allocated memory */ 496 #if defined(FEAT_SMARTINDENT) || defined(FEAT_VREPLACE) || defined(FEAT_LISP) \ 497 || defined(FEAT_CINDENT) || defined(FEAT_COMMENTS) 498 char_u *p; 499 #endif 500 int saved_char = NUL; /* init for GCC */ 501 #if defined(FEAT_SMARTINDENT) || defined(FEAT_COMMENTS) 502 pos_T *pos; 503 #endif 504 #ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT 505 int do_si = (!p_paste && curbuf->b_p_si 506 # ifdef FEAT_CINDENT 507 && !curbuf->b_p_cin 508 # endif 509 ); 510 int no_si = FALSE; /* reset did_si afterwards */ 511 int first_char = NUL; /* init for GCC */ 512 #endif 513 #if defined(FEAT_VREPLACE) && (defined(FEAT_LISP) || defined(FEAT_CINDENT)) 514 int vreplace_mode; 515 #endif 516 int did_append; /* appended a new line */ 517 int saved_pi = curbuf->b_p_pi; /* copy of preserveindent setting */ 518 519 /* 520 * make a copy of the current line so we can mess with it 521 */ 522 saved_line = vim_strsave(ml_get_curline()); 523 if (saved_line == NULL) /* out of memory! */ 524 return FALSE; 525 526 #ifdef FEAT_VREPLACE 527 if (State & VREPLACE_FLAG) 528 { 529 /* 530 * With VREPLACE we make a copy of the next line, which we will be 531 * starting to replace. First make the new line empty and let vim play 532 * with the indenting and comment leader to its heart's content. Then 533 * we grab what it ended up putting on the new line, put back the 534 * original line, and call ins_char() to put each new character onto 535 * the line, replacing what was there before and pushing the right 536 * stuff onto the replace stack. -- webb. 537 */ 538 if (curwin->w_cursor.lnum < orig_line_count) 539 next_line = vim_strsave(ml_get(curwin->w_cursor.lnum + 1)); 540 else 541 next_line = vim_strsave((char_u *)""); 542 if (next_line == NULL) /* out of memory! */ 543 goto theend; 544 545 /* 546 * In VREPLACE mode, a NL replaces the rest of the line, and starts 547 * replacing the next line, so push all of the characters left on the 548 * line onto the replace stack. We'll push any other characters that 549 * might be replaced at the start of the next line (due to autoindent 550 * etc) a bit later. 551 */ 552 replace_push(NUL); /* Call twice because BS over NL expects it */ 553 replace_push(NUL); 554 p = saved_line + curwin->w_cursor.col; 555 while (*p != NUL) 556 replace_push(*p++); 557 saved_line[curwin->w_cursor.col] = NUL; 558 } 559 #endif 560 561 if ((State & INSERT) 562 #ifdef FEAT_VREPLACE 563 && !(State & VREPLACE_FLAG) 564 #endif 565 ) 566 { 567 p_extra = saved_line + curwin->w_cursor.col; 568 #ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT 569 if (do_si) /* need first char after new line break */ 570 { 571 p = skipwhite(p_extra); 572 first_char = *p; 573 } 574 #endif 575 #ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS 576 extra_len = (int)STRLEN(p_extra); 577 #endif 578 saved_char = *p_extra; 579 *p_extra = NUL; 580 } 581 582 u_clearline(); /* cannot do "U" command when adding lines */ 583 #ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT 584 did_si = FALSE; 585 #endif 586 ai_col = 0; 587 588 /* 589 * If we just did an auto-indent, then we didn't type anything on 590 * the prior line, and it should be truncated. Do this even if 'ai' is not 591 * set because automatically inserting a comment leader also sets did_ai. 592 */ 593 if (dir == FORWARD && did_ai) 594 trunc_line = TRUE; 595 596 /* 597 * If 'autoindent' and/or 'smartindent' is set, try to figure out what 598 * indent to use for the new line. 599 */ 600 if (curbuf->b_p_ai 601 #ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT 602 || do_si 603 #endif 604 ) 605 { 606 /* 607 * count white space on current line 608 */ 609 newindent = get_indent_str(saved_line, (int)curbuf->b_p_ts); 610 if (newindent == 0) 611 newindent = old_indent; /* for ^^D command in insert mode */ 612 613 #ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT 614 /* 615 * Do smart indenting. 616 * In insert/replace mode (only when dir == FORWARD) 617 * we may move some text to the next line. If it starts with '{' 618 * don't add an indent. Fixes inserting a NL before '{' in line 619 * "if (condition) {" 620 */ 621 if (!trunc_line && do_si && *saved_line != NUL 622 && (p_extra == NULL || first_char != '{')) 623 { 624 char_u *ptr; 625 char_u last_char; 626 627 old_cursor = curwin->w_cursor; 628 ptr = saved_line; 629 # ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS 630 if (flags & OPENLINE_DO_COM) 631 lead_len = get_leader_len(ptr, NULL, FALSE); 632 else 633 lead_len = 0; 634 # endif 635 if (dir == FORWARD) 636 { 637 /* 638 * Skip preprocessor directives, unless they are 639 * recognised as comments. 640 */ 641 if ( 642 # ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS 643 lead_len == 0 && 644 # endif 645 ptr[0] == '#') 646 { 647 while (ptr[0] == '#' && curwin->w_cursor.lnum > 1) 648 ptr = ml_get(--curwin->w_cursor.lnum); 649 newindent = get_indent(); 650 } 651 # ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS 652 if (flags & OPENLINE_DO_COM) 653 lead_len = get_leader_len(ptr, NULL, FALSE); 654 else 655 lead_len = 0; 656 if (lead_len > 0) 657 { 658 /* 659 * This case gets the following right: 660 * \* 661 * * A comment (read '\' as '/'). 662 * *\ 663 * #define IN_THE_WAY 664 * This should line up here; 665 */ 666 p = skipwhite(ptr); 667 if (p[0] == '/' && p[1] == '*') 668 p++; 669 if (p[0] == '*') 670 { 671 for (p++; *p; p++) 672 { 673 if (p[0] == '/' && p[-1] == '*') 674 { 675 /* 676 * End of C comment, indent should line up 677 * with the line containing the start of 678 * the comment 679 */ 680 curwin->w_cursor.col = (colnr_T)(p - ptr); 681 if ((pos = findmatch(NULL, NUL)) != NULL) 682 { 683 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = pos->lnum; 684 newindent = get_indent(); 685 } 686 } 687 } 688 } 689 } 690 else /* Not a comment line */ 691 # endif 692 { 693 /* Find last non-blank in line */ 694 p = ptr + STRLEN(ptr) - 1; 695 while (p > ptr && vim_iswhite(*p)) 696 --p; 697 last_char = *p; 698 699 /* 700 * find the character just before the '{' or ';' 701 */ 702 if (last_char == '{' || last_char == ';') 703 { 704 if (p > ptr) 705 --p; 706 while (p > ptr && vim_iswhite(*p)) 707 --p; 708 } 709 /* 710 * Try to catch lines that are split over multiple 711 * lines. eg: 712 * if (condition && 713 * condition) { 714 * Should line up here! 715 * } 716 */ 717 if (*p == ')') 718 { 719 curwin->w_cursor.col = (colnr_T)(p - ptr); 720 if ((pos = findmatch(NULL, '(')) != NULL) 721 { 722 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = pos->lnum; 723 newindent = get_indent(); 724 ptr = ml_get_curline(); 725 } 726 } 727 /* 728 * If last character is '{' do indent, without 729 * checking for "if" and the like. 730 */ 731 if (last_char == '{') 732 { 733 did_si = TRUE; /* do indent */ 734 no_si = TRUE; /* don't delete it when '{' typed */ 735 } 736 /* 737 * Look for "if" and the like, use 'cinwords'. 738 * Don't do this if the previous line ended in ';' or 739 * '}'. 740 */ 741 else if (last_char != ';' && last_char != '}' 742 && cin_is_cinword(ptr)) 743 did_si = TRUE; 744 } 745 } 746 else /* dir == BACKWARD */ 747 { 748 /* 749 * Skip preprocessor directives, unless they are 750 * recognised as comments. 751 */ 752 if ( 753 # ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS 754 lead_len == 0 && 755 # endif 756 ptr[0] == '#') 757 { 758 int was_backslashed = FALSE; 759 760 while ((ptr[0] == '#' || was_backslashed) && 761 curwin->w_cursor.lnum < curbuf->b_ml.ml_line_count) 762 { 763 if (*ptr && ptr[STRLEN(ptr) - 1] == '\\') 764 was_backslashed = TRUE; 765 else 766 was_backslashed = FALSE; 767 ptr = ml_get(++curwin->w_cursor.lnum); 768 } 769 if (was_backslashed) 770 newindent = 0; /* Got to end of file */ 771 else 772 newindent = get_indent(); 773 } 774 p = skipwhite(ptr); 775 if (*p == '}') /* if line starts with '}': do indent */ 776 did_si = TRUE; 777 else /* can delete indent when '{' typed */ 778 can_si_back = TRUE; 779 } 780 curwin->w_cursor = old_cursor; 781 } 782 if (do_si) 783 can_si = TRUE; 784 #endif /* FEAT_SMARTINDENT */ 785 786 did_ai = TRUE; 787 } 788 789 #ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS 790 /* 791 * Find out if the current line starts with a comment leader. 792 * This may then be inserted in front of the new line. 793 */ 794 end_comment_pending = NUL; 795 if (flags & OPENLINE_DO_COM) 796 lead_len = get_leader_len(saved_line, &lead_flags, dir == BACKWARD); 797 else 798 lead_len = 0; 799 if (lead_len > 0) 800 { 801 char_u *lead_repl = NULL; /* replaces comment leader */ 802 int lead_repl_len = 0; /* length of *lead_repl */ 803 char_u lead_middle[COM_MAX_LEN]; /* middle-comment string */ 804 char_u lead_end[COM_MAX_LEN]; /* end-comment string */ 805 char_u *comment_end = NULL; /* where lead_end has been found */ 806 int extra_space = FALSE; /* append extra space */ 807 int current_flag; 808 int require_blank = FALSE; /* requires blank after middle */ 809 char_u *p2; 810 811 /* 812 * If the comment leader has the start, middle or end flag, it may not 813 * be used or may be replaced with the middle leader. 814 */ 815 for (p = lead_flags; *p && *p != ':'; ++p) 816 { 817 if (*p == COM_BLANK) 818 { 819 require_blank = TRUE; 820 continue; 821 } 822 if (*p == COM_START || *p == COM_MIDDLE) 823 { 824 current_flag = *p; 825 if (*p == COM_START) 826 { 827 /* 828 * Doing "O" on a start of comment does not insert leader. 829 */ 830 if (dir == BACKWARD) 831 { 832 lead_len = 0; 833 break; 834 } 835 836 /* find start of middle part */ 837 (void)copy_option_part(&p, lead_middle, COM_MAX_LEN, ","); 838 require_blank = FALSE; 839 } 840 841 /* 842 * Isolate the strings of the middle and end leader. 843 */ 844 while (*p && p[-1] != ':') /* find end of middle flags */ 845 { 846 if (*p == COM_BLANK) 847 require_blank = TRUE; 848 ++p; 849 } 850 (void)copy_option_part(&p, lead_middle, COM_MAX_LEN, ","); 851 852 while (*p && p[-1] != ':') /* find end of end flags */ 853 { 854 /* Check whether we allow automatic ending of comments */ 855 if (*p == COM_AUTO_END) 856 end_comment_pending = -1; /* means we want to set it */ 857 ++p; 858 } 859 n = copy_option_part(&p, lead_end, COM_MAX_LEN, ","); 860 861 if (end_comment_pending == -1) /* we can set it now */ 862 end_comment_pending = lead_end[n - 1]; 863 864 /* 865 * If the end of the comment is in the same line, don't use 866 * the comment leader. 867 */ 868 if (dir == FORWARD) 869 { 870 for (p = saved_line + lead_len; *p; ++p) 871 if (STRNCMP(p, lead_end, n) == 0) 872 { 873 comment_end = p; 874 lead_len = 0; 875 break; 876 } 877 } 878 879 /* 880 * Doing "o" on a start of comment inserts the middle leader. 881 */ 882 if (lead_len > 0) 883 { 884 if (current_flag == COM_START) 885 { 886 lead_repl = lead_middle; 887 lead_repl_len = (int)STRLEN(lead_middle); 888 } 889 890 /* 891 * If we have hit RETURN immediately after the start 892 * comment leader, then put a space after the middle 893 * comment leader on the next line. 894 */ 895 if (!vim_iswhite(saved_line[lead_len - 1]) 896 && ((p_extra != NULL 897 && (int)curwin->w_cursor.col == lead_len) 898 || (p_extra == NULL 899 && saved_line[lead_len] == NUL) 900 || require_blank)) 901 extra_space = TRUE; 902 } 903 break; 904 } 905 if (*p == COM_END) 906 { 907 /* 908 * Doing "o" on the end of a comment does not insert leader. 909 * Remember where the end is, might want to use it to find the 910 * start (for C-comments). 911 */ 912 if (dir == FORWARD) 913 { 914 comment_end = skipwhite(saved_line); 915 lead_len = 0; 916 break; 917 } 918 919 /* 920 * Doing "O" on the end of a comment inserts the middle leader. 921 * Find the string for the middle leader, searching backwards. 922 */ 923 while (p > curbuf->b_p_com && *p != ',') 924 --p; 925 for (lead_repl = p; lead_repl > curbuf->b_p_com 926 && lead_repl[-1] != ':'; --lead_repl) 927 ; 928 lead_repl_len = (int)(p - lead_repl); 929 930 /* We can probably always add an extra space when doing "O" on 931 * the comment-end */ 932 extra_space = TRUE; 933 934 /* Check whether we allow automatic ending of comments */ 935 for (p2 = p; *p2 && *p2 != ':'; p2++) 936 { 937 if (*p2 == COM_AUTO_END) 938 end_comment_pending = -1; /* means we want to set it */ 939 } 940 if (end_comment_pending == -1) 941 { 942 /* Find last character in end-comment string */ 943 while (*p2 && *p2 != ',') 944 p2++; 945 end_comment_pending = p2[-1]; 946 } 947 break; 948 } 949 if (*p == COM_FIRST) 950 { 951 /* 952 * Comment leader for first line only: Don't repeat leader 953 * when using "O", blank out leader when using "o". 954 */ 955 if (dir == BACKWARD) 956 lead_len = 0; 957 else 958 { 959 lead_repl = (char_u *)""; 960 lead_repl_len = 0; 961 } 962 break; 963 } 964 } 965 if (lead_len) 966 { 967 /* allocate buffer (may concatenate p_exta later) */ 968 leader = alloc(lead_len + lead_repl_len + extra_space + 969 extra_len + 1); 970 allocated = leader; /* remember to free it later */ 971 972 if (leader == NULL) 973 lead_len = 0; 974 else 975 { 976 vim_strncpy(leader, saved_line, lead_len); 977 978 /* 979 * Replace leader with lead_repl, right or left adjusted 980 */ 981 if (lead_repl != NULL) 982 { 983 int c = 0; 984 int off = 0; 985 986 for (p = lead_flags; *p && *p != ':'; ++p) 987 { 988 if (*p == COM_RIGHT || *p == COM_LEFT) 989 c = *p; 990 else if (VIM_ISDIGIT(*p) || *p == '-') 991 off = getdigits(&p); 992 } 993 if (c == COM_RIGHT) /* right adjusted leader */ 994 { 995 /* find last non-white in the leader to line up with */ 996 for (p = leader + lead_len - 1; p > leader 997 && vim_iswhite(*p); --p) 998 ; 999 ++p; 1000 1001 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE 1002 /* Compute the length of the replaced characters in 1003 * screen characters, not bytes. */ 1004 { 1005 int repl_size = vim_strnsize(lead_repl, 1006 lead_repl_len); 1007 int old_size = 0; 1008 char_u *endp = p; 1009 int l; 1010 1011 while (old_size < repl_size && p > leader) 1012 { 1013 mb_ptr_back(leader, p); 1014 old_size += ptr2cells(p); 1015 } 1016 l = lead_repl_len - (int)(endp - p); 1017 if (l != 0) 1018 mch_memmove(endp + l, endp, 1019 (size_t)((leader + lead_len) - endp)); 1020 lead_len += l; 1021 } 1022 #else 1023 if (p < leader + lead_repl_len) 1024 p = leader; 1025 else 1026 p -= lead_repl_len; 1027 #endif 1028 mch_memmove(p, lead_repl, (size_t)lead_repl_len); 1029 if (p + lead_repl_len > leader + lead_len) 1030 p[lead_repl_len] = NUL; 1031 1032 /* blank-out any other chars from the old leader. */ 1033 while (--p >= leader) 1034 { 1035 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE 1036 int l = mb_head_off(leader, p); 1037 1038 if (l > 1) 1039 { 1040 p -= l; 1041 if (ptr2cells(p) > 1) 1042 { 1043 p[1] = ' '; 1044 --l; 1045 } 1046 mch_memmove(p + 1, p + l + 1, 1047 (size_t)((leader + lead_len) - (p + l + 1))); 1048 lead_len -= l; 1049 *p = ' '; 1050 } 1051 else 1052 #endif 1053 if (!vim_iswhite(*p)) 1054 *p = ' '; 1055 } 1056 } 1057 else /* left adjusted leader */ 1058 { 1059 p = skipwhite(leader); 1060 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE 1061 /* Compute the length of the replaced characters in 1062 * screen characters, not bytes. Move the part that is 1063 * not to be overwritten. */ 1064 { 1065 int repl_size = vim_strnsize(lead_repl, 1066 lead_repl_len); 1067 int i; 1068 int l; 1069 1070 for (i = 0; p[i] != NUL && i < lead_len; i += l) 1071 { 1072 l = (*mb_ptr2len)(p + i); 1073 if (vim_strnsize(p, i + l) > repl_size) 1074 break; 1075 } 1076 if (i != lead_repl_len) 1077 { 1078 mch_memmove(p + lead_repl_len, p + i, 1079 (size_t)(lead_len - i - (leader - p))); 1080 lead_len += lead_repl_len - i; 1081 } 1082 } 1083 #endif 1084 mch_memmove(p, lead_repl, (size_t)lead_repl_len); 1085 1086 /* Replace any remaining non-white chars in the old 1087 * leader by spaces. Keep Tabs, the indent must 1088 * remain the same. */ 1089 for (p += lead_repl_len; p < leader + lead_len; ++p) 1090 if (!vim_iswhite(*p)) 1091 { 1092 /* Don't put a space before a TAB. */ 1093 if (p + 1 < leader + lead_len && p[1] == TAB) 1094 { 1095 --lead_len; 1096 mch_memmove(p, p + 1, 1097 (leader + lead_len) - p); 1098 } 1099 else 1100 { 1101 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE 1102 int l = (*mb_ptr2len)(p); 1103 1104 if (l > 1) 1105 { 1106 if (ptr2cells(p) > 1) 1107 { 1108 /* Replace a double-wide char with 1109 * two spaces */ 1110 --l; 1111 *p++ = ' '; 1112 } 1113 mch_memmove(p + 1, p + l, 1114 (leader + lead_len) - p); 1115 lead_len -= l - 1; 1116 } 1117 #endif 1118 *p = ' '; 1119 } 1120 } 1121 *p = NUL; 1122 } 1123 1124 /* Recompute the indent, it may have changed. */ 1125 if (curbuf->b_p_ai 1126 #ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT 1127 || do_si 1128 #endif 1129 ) 1130 newindent = get_indent_str(leader, (int)curbuf->b_p_ts); 1131 1132 /* Add the indent offset */ 1133 if (newindent + off < 0) 1134 { 1135 off = -newindent; 1136 newindent = 0; 1137 } 1138 else 1139 newindent += off; 1140 1141 /* Correct trailing spaces for the shift, so that 1142 * alignment remains equal. */ 1143 while (off > 0 && lead_len > 0 1144 && leader[lead_len - 1] == ' ') 1145 { 1146 /* Don't do it when there is a tab before the space */ 1147 if (vim_strchr(skipwhite(leader), '\t') != NULL) 1148 break; 1149 --lead_len; 1150 --off; 1151 } 1152 1153 /* If the leader ends in white space, don't add an 1154 * extra space */ 1155 if (lead_len > 0 && vim_iswhite(leader[lead_len - 1])) 1156 extra_space = FALSE; 1157 leader[lead_len] = NUL; 1158 } 1159 1160 if (extra_space) 1161 { 1162 leader[lead_len++] = ' '; 1163 leader[lead_len] = NUL; 1164 } 1165 1166 newcol = lead_len; 1167 1168 /* 1169 * if a new indent will be set below, remove the indent that 1170 * is in the comment leader 1171 */ 1172 if (newindent 1173 #ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT 1174 || did_si 1175 #endif 1176 ) 1177 { 1178 while (lead_len && vim_iswhite(*leader)) 1179 { 1180 --lead_len; 1181 --newcol; 1182 ++leader; 1183 } 1184 } 1185 1186 } 1187 #ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT 1188 did_si = can_si = FALSE; 1189 #endif 1190 } 1191 else if (comment_end != NULL) 1192 { 1193 /* 1194 * We have finished a comment, so we don't use the leader. 1195 * If this was a C-comment and 'ai' or 'si' is set do a normal 1196 * indent to align with the line containing the start of the 1197 * comment. 1198 */ 1199 if (comment_end[0] == '*' && comment_end[1] == '/' && 1200 (curbuf->b_p_ai 1201 #ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT 1202 || do_si 1203 #endif 1204 )) 1205 { 1206 old_cursor = curwin->w_cursor; 1207 curwin->w_cursor.col = (colnr_T)(comment_end - saved_line); 1208 if ((pos = findmatch(NULL, NUL)) != NULL) 1209 { 1210 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = pos->lnum; 1211 newindent = get_indent(); 1212 } 1213 curwin->w_cursor = old_cursor; 1214 } 1215 } 1216 } 1217 #endif 1218 1219 /* (State == INSERT || State == REPLACE), only when dir == FORWARD */ 1220 if (p_extra != NULL) 1221 { 1222 *p_extra = saved_char; /* restore char that NUL replaced */ 1223 1224 /* 1225 * When 'ai' set or "flags" has OPENLINE_DELSPACES, skip to the first 1226 * non-blank. 1227 * 1228 * When in REPLACE mode, put the deleted blanks on the replace stack, 1229 * preceded by a NUL, so they can be put back when a BS is entered. 1230 */ 1231 if (REPLACE_NORMAL(State)) 1232 replace_push(NUL); /* end of extra blanks */ 1233 if (curbuf->b_p_ai || (flags & OPENLINE_DELSPACES)) 1234 { 1235 while ((*p_extra == ' ' || *p_extra == '\t') 1236 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE 1237 && (!enc_utf8 1238 || !utf_iscomposing(utf_ptr2char(p_extra + 1))) 1239 #endif 1240 ) 1241 { 1242 if (REPLACE_NORMAL(State)) 1243 replace_push(*p_extra); 1244 ++p_extra; 1245 ++less_cols_off; 1246 } 1247 } 1248 if (*p_extra != NUL) 1249 did_ai = FALSE; /* append some text, don't truncate now */ 1250 1251 /* columns for marks adjusted for removed columns */ 1252 less_cols = (int)(p_extra - saved_line); 1253 } 1254 1255 if (p_extra == NULL) 1256 p_extra = (char_u *)""; /* append empty line */ 1257 1258 #ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS 1259 /* concatenate leader and p_extra, if there is a leader */ 1260 if (lead_len) 1261 { 1262 STRCAT(leader, p_extra); 1263 p_extra = leader; 1264 did_ai = TRUE; /* So truncating blanks works with comments */ 1265 less_cols -= lead_len; 1266 } 1267 else 1268 end_comment_pending = NUL; /* turns out there was no leader */ 1269 #endif 1270 1271 old_cursor = curwin->w_cursor; 1272 if (dir == BACKWARD) 1273 --curwin->w_cursor.lnum; 1274 #ifdef FEAT_VREPLACE 1275 if (!(State & VREPLACE_FLAG) || old_cursor.lnum >= orig_line_count) 1276 #endif 1277 { 1278 if (ml_append(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, p_extra, (colnr_T)0, FALSE) 1279 == FAIL) 1280 goto theend; 1281 /* Postpone calling changed_lines(), because it would mess up folding 1282 * with markers. */ 1283 mark_adjust(curwin->w_cursor.lnum + 1, (linenr_T)MAXLNUM, 1L, 0L); 1284 did_append = TRUE; 1285 } 1286 #ifdef FEAT_VREPLACE 1287 else 1288 { 1289 /* 1290 * In VREPLACE mode we are starting to replace the next line. 1291 */ 1292 curwin->w_cursor.lnum++; 1293 if (curwin->w_cursor.lnum >= Insstart.lnum + vr_lines_changed) 1294 { 1295 /* In case we NL to a new line, BS to the previous one, and NL 1296 * again, we don't want to save the new line for undo twice. 1297 */ 1298 (void)u_save_cursor(); /* errors are ignored! */ 1299 vr_lines_changed++; 1300 } 1301 ml_replace(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, p_extra, TRUE); 1302 changed_bytes(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, 0); 1303 curwin->w_cursor.lnum--; 1304 did_append = FALSE; 1305 } 1306 #endif 1307 1308 if (newindent 1309 #ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT 1310 || did_si 1311 #endif 1312 ) 1313 { 1314 ++curwin->w_cursor.lnum; 1315 #ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT 1316 if (did_si) 1317 { 1318 if (p_sr) 1319 newindent -= newindent % (int)curbuf->b_p_sw; 1320 newindent += (int)curbuf->b_p_sw; 1321 } 1322 #endif 1323 /* Copy the indent only if expand tab is disabled */ 1324 if (curbuf->b_p_ci && !curbuf->b_p_et) 1325 { 1326 (void)copy_indent(newindent, saved_line); 1327 1328 /* 1329 * Set the 'preserveindent' option so that any further screwing 1330 * with the line doesn't entirely destroy our efforts to preserve 1331 * it. It gets restored at the function end. 1332 */ 1333 curbuf->b_p_pi = TRUE; 1334 } 1335 else 1336 (void)set_indent(newindent, SIN_INSERT); 1337 less_cols -= curwin->w_cursor.col; 1338 1339 ai_col = curwin->w_cursor.col; 1340 1341 /* 1342 * In REPLACE mode, for each character in the new indent, there must 1343 * be a NUL on the replace stack, for when it is deleted with BS 1344 */ 1345 if (REPLACE_NORMAL(State)) 1346 for (n = 0; n < (int)curwin->w_cursor.col; ++n) 1347 replace_push(NUL); 1348 newcol += curwin->w_cursor.col; 1349 #ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT 1350 if (no_si) 1351 did_si = FALSE; 1352 #endif 1353 } 1354 1355 #ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS 1356 /* 1357 * In REPLACE mode, for each character in the extra leader, there must be 1358 * a NUL on the replace stack, for when it is deleted with BS. 1359 */ 1360 if (REPLACE_NORMAL(State)) 1361 while (lead_len-- > 0) 1362 replace_push(NUL); 1363 #endif 1364 1365 curwin->w_cursor = old_cursor; 1366 1367 if (dir == FORWARD) 1368 { 1369 if (trunc_line || (State & INSERT)) 1370 { 1371 /* truncate current line at cursor */ 1372 saved_line[curwin->w_cursor.col] = NUL; 1373 /* Remove trailing white space, unless OPENLINE_KEEPTRAIL used. */ 1374 if (trunc_line && !(flags & OPENLINE_KEEPTRAIL)) 1375 truncate_spaces(saved_line); 1376 ml_replace(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, saved_line, FALSE); 1377 saved_line = NULL; 1378 if (did_append) 1379 { 1380 changed_lines(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, curwin->w_cursor.col, 1381 curwin->w_cursor.lnum + 1, 1L); 1382 did_append = FALSE; 1383 1384 /* Move marks after the line break to the new line. */ 1385 if (flags & OPENLINE_MARKFIX) 1386 mark_col_adjust(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, 1387 curwin->w_cursor.col + less_cols_off, 1388 1L, (long)-less_cols); 1389 } 1390 else 1391 changed_bytes(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, curwin->w_cursor.col); 1392 } 1393 1394 /* 1395 * Put the cursor on the new line. Careful: the scrollup() above may 1396 * have moved w_cursor, we must use old_cursor. 1397 */ 1398 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = old_cursor.lnum + 1; 1399 } 1400 if (did_append) 1401 changed_lines(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, 0, curwin->w_cursor.lnum, 1L); 1402 1403 curwin->w_cursor.col = newcol; 1404 #ifdef FEAT_VIRTUALEDIT 1405 curwin->w_cursor.coladd = 0; 1406 #endif 1407 1408 #if defined(FEAT_VREPLACE) && (defined(FEAT_LISP) || defined(FEAT_CINDENT)) 1409 /* 1410 * In VREPLACE mode, we are handling the replace stack ourselves, so stop 1411 * fixthisline() from doing it (via change_indent()) by telling it we're in 1412 * normal INSERT mode. 1413 */ 1414 if (State & VREPLACE_FLAG) 1415 { 1416 vreplace_mode = State; /* So we know to put things right later */ 1417 State = INSERT; 1418 } 1419 else 1420 vreplace_mode = 0; 1421 #endif 1422 #ifdef FEAT_LISP 1423 /* 1424 * May do lisp indenting. 1425 */ 1426 if (!p_paste 1427 # ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS 1428 && leader == NULL 1429 # endif 1430 && curbuf->b_p_lisp 1431 && curbuf->b_p_ai) 1432 { 1433 fixthisline(get_lisp_indent); 1434 p = ml_get_curline(); 1435 ai_col = (colnr_T)(skipwhite(p) - p); 1436 } 1437 #endif 1438 #ifdef FEAT_CINDENT 1439 /* 1440 * May do indenting after opening a new line. 1441 */ 1442 if (!p_paste 1443 && (curbuf->b_p_cin 1444 # ifdef FEAT_EVAL 1445 || *curbuf->b_p_inde != NUL 1446 # endif 1447 ) 1448 && in_cinkeys(dir == FORWARD 1449 ? KEY_OPEN_FORW 1450 : KEY_OPEN_BACK, ' ', linewhite(curwin->w_cursor.lnum))) 1451 { 1452 do_c_expr_indent(); 1453 p = ml_get_curline(); 1454 ai_col = (colnr_T)(skipwhite(p) - p); 1455 } 1456 #endif 1457 #if defined(FEAT_VREPLACE) && (defined(FEAT_LISP) || defined(FEAT_CINDENT)) 1458 if (vreplace_mode != 0) 1459 State = vreplace_mode; 1460 #endif 1461 1462 #ifdef FEAT_VREPLACE 1463 /* 1464 * Finally, VREPLACE gets the stuff on the new line, then puts back the 1465 * original line, and inserts the new stuff char by char, pushing old stuff 1466 * onto the replace stack (via ins_char()). 1467 */ 1468 if (State & VREPLACE_FLAG) 1469 { 1470 /* Put new line in p_extra */ 1471 p_extra = vim_strsave(ml_get_curline()); 1472 if (p_extra == NULL) 1473 goto theend; 1474 1475 /* Put back original line */ 1476 ml_replace(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, next_line, FALSE); 1477 1478 /* Insert new stuff into line again */ 1479 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0; 1480 #ifdef FEAT_VIRTUALEDIT 1481 curwin->w_cursor.coladd = 0; 1482 #endif 1483 ins_bytes(p_extra); /* will call changed_bytes() */ 1484 vim_free(p_extra); 1485 next_line = NULL; 1486 } 1487 #endif 1488 1489 retval = TRUE; /* success! */ 1490 theend: 1491 curbuf->b_p_pi = saved_pi; 1492 vim_free(saved_line); 1493 vim_free(next_line); 1494 vim_free(allocated); 1495 return retval; 1496 } 1497 1498 #if defined(FEAT_COMMENTS) || defined(PROTO) 1499 /* 1500 * get_leader_len() returns the length of the prefix of the given string 1501 * which introduces a comment. If this string is not a comment then 0 is 1502 * returned. 1503 * When "flags" is not NULL, it is set to point to the flags of the recognized 1504 * comment leader. 1505 * "backward" must be true for the "O" command. 1506 */ 1507 int 1508 get_leader_len(line, flags, backward) 1509 char_u *line; 1510 char_u **flags; 1511 int backward; 1512 { 1513 int i, j; 1514 int got_com = FALSE; 1515 int found_one; 1516 char_u part_buf[COM_MAX_LEN]; /* buffer for one option part */ 1517 char_u *string; /* pointer to comment string */ 1518 char_u *list; 1519 1520 i = 0; 1521 while (vim_iswhite(line[i])) /* leading white space is ignored */ 1522 ++i; 1523 1524 /* 1525 * Repeat to match several nested comment strings. 1526 */ 1527 while (line[i]) 1528 { 1529 /* 1530 * scan through the 'comments' option for a match 1531 */ 1532 found_one = FALSE; 1533 for (list = curbuf->b_p_com; *list; ) 1534 { 1535 /* 1536 * Get one option part into part_buf[]. Advance list to next one. 1537 * put string at start of string. 1538 */ 1539 if (!got_com && flags != NULL) /* remember where flags started */ 1540 *flags = list; 1541 (void)copy_option_part(&list, part_buf, COM_MAX_LEN, ","); 1542 string = vim_strchr(part_buf, ':'); 1543 if (string == NULL) /* missing ':', ignore this part */ 1544 continue; 1545 *string++ = NUL; /* isolate flags from string */ 1546 1547 /* 1548 * When already found a nested comment, only accept further 1549 * nested comments. 1550 */ 1551 if (got_com && vim_strchr(part_buf, COM_NEST) == NULL) 1552 continue; 1553 1554 /* When 'O' flag used don't use for "O" command */ 1555 if (backward && vim_strchr(part_buf, COM_NOBACK) != NULL) 1556 continue; 1557 1558 /* 1559 * Line contents and string must match. 1560 * When string starts with white space, must have some white space 1561 * (but the amount does not need to match, there might be a mix of 1562 * TABs and spaces). 1563 */ 1564 if (vim_iswhite(string[0])) 1565 { 1566 if (i == 0 || !vim_iswhite(line[i - 1])) 1567 continue; 1568 while (vim_iswhite(string[0])) 1569 ++string; 1570 } 1571 for (j = 0; string[j] != NUL && string[j] == line[i + j]; ++j) 1572 ; 1573 if (string[j] != NUL) 1574 continue; 1575 1576 /* 1577 * When 'b' flag used, there must be white space or an 1578 * end-of-line after the string in the line. 1579 */ 1580 if (vim_strchr(part_buf, COM_BLANK) != NULL 1581 && !vim_iswhite(line[i + j]) && line[i + j] != NUL) 1582 continue; 1583 1584 /* 1585 * We have found a match, stop searching. 1586 */ 1587 i += j; 1588 got_com = TRUE; 1589 found_one = TRUE; 1590 break; 1591 } 1592 1593 /* 1594 * No match found, stop scanning. 1595 */ 1596 if (!found_one) 1597 break; 1598 1599 /* 1600 * Include any trailing white space. 1601 */ 1602 while (vim_iswhite(line[i])) 1603 ++i; 1604 1605 /* 1606 * If this comment doesn't nest, stop here. 1607 */ 1608 if (vim_strchr(part_buf, COM_NEST) == NULL) 1609 break; 1610 } 1611 return (got_com ? i : 0); 1612 } 1613 #endif 1614 1615 /* 1616 * Return the number of window lines occupied by buffer line "lnum". 1617 */ 1618 int 1619 plines(lnum) 1620 linenr_T lnum; 1621 { 1622 return plines_win(curwin, lnum, TRUE); 1623 } 1624 1625 int 1626 plines_win(wp, lnum, winheight) 1627 win_T *wp; 1628 linenr_T lnum; 1629 int winheight; /* when TRUE limit to window height */ 1630 { 1631 #if defined(FEAT_DIFF) || defined(PROTO) 1632 /* Check for filler lines above this buffer line. When folded the result 1633 * is one line anyway. */ 1634 return plines_win_nofill(wp, lnum, winheight) + diff_check_fill(wp, lnum); 1635 } 1636 1637 int 1638 plines_nofill(lnum) 1639 linenr_T lnum; 1640 { 1641 return plines_win_nofill(curwin, lnum, TRUE); 1642 } 1643 1644 int 1645 plines_win_nofill(wp, lnum, winheight) 1646 win_T *wp; 1647 linenr_T lnum; 1648 int winheight; /* when TRUE limit to window height */ 1649 { 1650 #endif 1651 int lines; 1652 1653 if (!wp->w_p_wrap) 1654 return 1; 1655 1656 #ifdef FEAT_VERTSPLIT 1657 if (wp->w_width == 0) 1658 return 1; 1659 #endif 1660 1661 #ifdef FEAT_FOLDING 1662 /* A folded lines is handled just like an empty line. */ 1663 /* NOTE: Caller must handle lines that are MAYBE folded. */ 1664 if (lineFolded(wp, lnum) == TRUE) 1665 return 1; 1666 #endif 1667 1668 lines = plines_win_nofold(wp, lnum); 1669 if (winheight > 0 && lines > wp->w_height) 1670 return (int)wp->w_height; 1671 return lines; 1672 } 1673 1674 /* 1675 * Return number of window lines physical line "lnum" will occupy in window 1676 * "wp". Does not care about folding, 'wrap' or 'diff'. 1677 */ 1678 int 1679 plines_win_nofold(wp, lnum) 1680 win_T *wp; 1681 linenr_T lnum; 1682 { 1683 char_u *s; 1684 long col; 1685 int width; 1686 1687 s = ml_get_buf(wp->w_buffer, lnum, FALSE); 1688 if (*s == NUL) /* empty line */ 1689 return 1; 1690 col = win_linetabsize(wp, s, (colnr_T)MAXCOL); 1691 1692 /* 1693 * If list mode is on, then the '$' at the end of the line may take up one 1694 * extra column. 1695 */ 1696 if (wp->w_p_list && lcs_eol != NUL) 1697 col += 1; 1698 1699 /* 1700 * Add column offset for 'number' and 'foldcolumn'. 1701 */ 1702 width = W_WIDTH(wp) - win_col_off(wp); 1703 if (width <= 0) 1704 return 32000; 1705 if (col <= width) 1706 return 1; 1707 col -= width; 1708 width += win_col_off2(wp); 1709 return (col + (width - 1)) / width + 1; 1710 } 1711 1712 /* 1713 * Like plines_win(), but only reports the number of physical screen lines 1714 * used from the start of the line to the given column number. 1715 */ 1716 int 1717 plines_win_col(wp, lnum, column) 1718 win_T *wp; 1719 linenr_T lnum; 1720 long column; 1721 { 1722 long col; 1723 char_u *s; 1724 int lines = 0; 1725 int width; 1726 1727 #ifdef FEAT_DIFF 1728 /* Check for filler lines above this buffer line. When folded the result 1729 * is one line anyway. */ 1730 lines = diff_check_fill(wp, lnum); 1731 #endif 1732 1733 if (!wp->w_p_wrap) 1734 return lines + 1; 1735 1736 #ifdef FEAT_VERTSPLIT 1737 if (wp->w_width == 0) 1738 return lines + 1; 1739 #endif 1740 1741 s = ml_get_buf(wp->w_buffer, lnum, FALSE); 1742 1743 col = 0; 1744 while (*s != NUL && --column >= 0) 1745 { 1746 col += win_lbr_chartabsize(wp, s, (colnr_T)col, NULL); 1747 mb_ptr_adv(s); 1748 } 1749 1750 /* 1751 * If *s is a TAB, and the TAB is not displayed as ^I, and we're not in 1752 * INSERT mode, then col must be adjusted so that it represents the last 1753 * screen position of the TAB. This only fixes an error when the TAB wraps 1754 * from one screen line to the next (when 'columns' is not a multiple of 1755 * 'ts') -- webb. 1756 */ 1757 if (*s == TAB && (State & NORMAL) && (!wp->w_p_list || lcs_tab1)) 1758 col += win_lbr_chartabsize(wp, s, (colnr_T)col, NULL) - 1; 1759 1760 /* 1761 * Add column offset for 'number', 'foldcolumn', etc. 1762 */ 1763 width = W_WIDTH(wp) - win_col_off(wp); 1764 if (width <= 0) 1765 return 9999; 1766 1767 lines += 1; 1768 if (col > width) 1769 lines += (col - width) / (width + win_col_off2(wp)) + 1; 1770 return lines; 1771 } 1772 1773 int 1774 plines_m_win(wp, first, last) 1775 win_T *wp; 1776 linenr_T first, last; 1777 { 1778 int count = 0; 1779 1780 while (first <= last) 1781 { 1782 #ifdef FEAT_FOLDING 1783 int x; 1784 1785 /* Check if there are any really folded lines, but also included lines 1786 * that are maybe folded. */ 1787 x = foldedCount(wp, first, NULL); 1788 if (x > 0) 1789 { 1790 ++count; /* count 1 for "+-- folded" line */ 1791 first += x; 1792 } 1793 else 1794 #endif 1795 { 1796 #ifdef FEAT_DIFF 1797 if (first == wp->w_topline) 1798 count += plines_win_nofill(wp, first, TRUE) + wp->w_topfill; 1799 else 1800 #endif 1801 count += plines_win(wp, first, TRUE); 1802 ++first; 1803 } 1804 } 1805 return (count); 1806 } 1807 1808 #if defined(FEAT_VREPLACE) || defined(FEAT_INS_EXPAND) || defined(PROTO) 1809 /* 1810 * Insert string "p" at the cursor position. Stops at a NUL byte. 1811 * Handles Replace mode and multi-byte characters. 1812 */ 1813 void 1814 ins_bytes(p) 1815 char_u *p; 1816 { 1817 ins_bytes_len(p, (int)STRLEN(p)); 1818 } 1819 #endif 1820 1821 #if defined(FEAT_VREPLACE) || defined(FEAT_INS_EXPAND) \ 1822 || defined(FEAT_COMMENTS) || defined(FEAT_MBYTE) || defined(PROTO) 1823 /* 1824 * Insert string "p" with length "len" at the cursor position. 1825 * Handles Replace mode and multi-byte characters. 1826 */ 1827 void 1828 ins_bytes_len(p, len) 1829 char_u *p; 1830 int len; 1831 { 1832 int i; 1833 # ifdef FEAT_MBYTE 1834 int n; 1835 1836 for (i = 0; i < len; i += n) 1837 { 1838 n = (*mb_ptr2len)(p + i); 1839 ins_char_bytes(p + i, n); 1840 } 1841 # else 1842 for (i = 0; i < len; ++i) 1843 ins_char(p[i]); 1844 # endif 1845 } 1846 #endif 1847 1848 /* 1849 * Insert or replace a single character at the cursor position. 1850 * When in REPLACE or VREPLACE mode, replace any existing character. 1851 * Caller must have prepared for undo. 1852 * For multi-byte characters we get the whole character, the caller must 1853 * convert bytes to a character. 1854 */ 1855 void 1856 ins_char(c) 1857 int c; 1858 { 1859 #if defined(FEAT_MBYTE) || defined(PROTO) 1860 char_u buf[MB_MAXBYTES]; 1861 int n; 1862 1863 n = (*mb_char2bytes)(c, buf); 1864 1865 /* When "c" is 0x100, 0x200, etc. we don't want to insert a NUL byte. 1866 * Happens for CTRL-Vu9900. */ 1867 if (buf[0] == 0) 1868 buf[0] = '\n'; 1869 1870 ins_char_bytes(buf, n); 1871 } 1872 1873 void 1874 ins_char_bytes(buf, charlen) 1875 char_u *buf; 1876 int charlen; 1877 { 1878 int c = buf[0]; 1879 int l, j; 1880 #endif 1881 int newlen; /* nr of bytes inserted */ 1882 int oldlen; /* nr of bytes deleted (0 when not replacing) */ 1883 char_u *p; 1884 char_u *newp; 1885 char_u *oldp; 1886 int linelen; /* length of old line including NUL */ 1887 colnr_T col; 1888 linenr_T lnum = curwin->w_cursor.lnum; 1889 int i; 1890 1891 #ifdef FEAT_VIRTUALEDIT 1892 /* Break tabs if needed. */ 1893 if (virtual_active() && curwin->w_cursor.coladd > 0) 1894 coladvance_force(getviscol()); 1895 #endif 1896 1897 col = curwin->w_cursor.col; 1898 oldp = ml_get(lnum); 1899 linelen = (int)STRLEN(oldp) + 1; 1900 1901 /* The lengths default to the values for when not replacing. */ 1902 oldlen = 0; 1903 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE 1904 newlen = charlen; 1905 #else 1906 newlen = 1; 1907 #endif 1908 1909 if (State & REPLACE_FLAG) 1910 { 1911 #ifdef FEAT_VREPLACE 1912 if (State & VREPLACE_FLAG) 1913 { 1914 colnr_T new_vcol = 0; /* init for GCC */ 1915 colnr_T vcol; 1916 int old_list; 1917 #ifndef FEAT_MBYTE 1918 char_u buf[2]; 1919 #endif 1920 1921 /* 1922 * Disable 'list' temporarily, unless 'cpo' contains the 'L' flag. 1923 * Returns the old value of list, so when finished, 1924 * curwin->w_p_list should be set back to this. 1925 */ 1926 old_list = curwin->w_p_list; 1927 if (old_list && vim_strchr(p_cpo, CPO_LISTWM) == NULL) 1928 curwin->w_p_list = FALSE; 1929 1930 /* 1931 * In virtual replace mode each character may replace one or more 1932 * characters (zero if it's a TAB). Count the number of bytes to 1933 * be deleted to make room for the new character, counting screen 1934 * cells. May result in adding spaces to fill a gap. 1935 */ 1936 getvcol(curwin, &curwin->w_cursor, NULL, &vcol, NULL); 1937 #ifndef FEAT_MBYTE 1938 buf[0] = c; 1939 buf[1] = NUL; 1940 #endif 1941 new_vcol = vcol + chartabsize(buf, vcol); 1942 while (oldp[col + oldlen] != NUL && vcol < new_vcol) 1943 { 1944 vcol += chartabsize(oldp + col + oldlen, vcol); 1945 /* Don't need to remove a TAB that takes us to the right 1946 * position. */ 1947 if (vcol > new_vcol && oldp[col + oldlen] == TAB) 1948 break; 1949 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE 1950 oldlen += (*mb_ptr2len)(oldp + col + oldlen); 1951 #else 1952 ++oldlen; 1953 #endif 1954 /* Deleted a bit too much, insert spaces. */ 1955 if (vcol > new_vcol) 1956 newlen += vcol - new_vcol; 1957 } 1958 curwin->w_p_list = old_list; 1959 } 1960 else 1961 #endif 1962 if (oldp[col] != NUL) 1963 { 1964 /* normal replace */ 1965 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE 1966 oldlen = (*mb_ptr2len)(oldp + col); 1967 #else 1968 oldlen = 1; 1969 #endif 1970 } 1971 1972 1973 /* Push the replaced bytes onto the replace stack, so that they can be 1974 * put back when BS is used. The bytes of a multi-byte character are 1975 * done the other way around, so that the first byte is popped off 1976 * first (it tells the byte length of the character). */ 1977 replace_push(NUL); 1978 for (i = 0; i < oldlen; ++i) 1979 { 1980 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE 1981 l = (*mb_ptr2len)(oldp + col + i) - 1; 1982 for (j = l; j >= 0; --j) 1983 replace_push(oldp[col + i + j]); 1984 i += l; 1985 #else 1986 replace_push(oldp[col + i]); 1987 #endif 1988 } 1989 } 1990 1991 newp = alloc_check((unsigned)(linelen + newlen - oldlen)); 1992 if (newp == NULL) 1993 return; 1994 1995 /* Copy bytes before the cursor. */ 1996 if (col > 0) 1997 mch_memmove(newp, oldp, (size_t)col); 1998 1999 /* Copy bytes after the changed character(s). */ 2000 p = newp + col; 2001 mch_memmove(p + newlen, oldp + col + oldlen, 2002 (size_t)(linelen - col - oldlen)); 2003 2004 /* Insert or overwrite the new character. */ 2005 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE 2006 mch_memmove(p, buf, charlen); 2007 i = charlen; 2008 #else 2009 *p = c; 2010 i = 1; 2011 #endif 2012 2013 /* Fill with spaces when necessary. */ 2014 while (i < newlen) 2015 p[i++] = ' '; 2016 2017 /* Replace the line in the buffer. */ 2018 ml_replace(lnum, newp, FALSE); 2019 2020 /* mark the buffer as changed and prepare for displaying */ 2021 changed_bytes(lnum, col); 2022 2023 /* 2024 * If we're in Insert or Replace mode and 'showmatch' is set, then briefly 2025 * show the match for right parens and braces. 2026 */ 2027 if (p_sm && (State & INSERT) 2028 && msg_silent == 0 2029 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE 2030 && charlen == 1 2031 #endif 2032 #ifdef FEAT_INS_EXPAND 2033 && !ins_compl_active() 2034 #endif 2035 ) 2036 showmatch(c); 2037 2038 #ifdef FEAT_RIGHTLEFT 2039 if (!p_ri || (State & REPLACE_FLAG)) 2040 #endif 2041 { 2042 /* Normal insert: move cursor right */ 2043 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE 2044 curwin->w_cursor.col += charlen; 2045 #else 2046 ++curwin->w_cursor.col; 2047 #endif 2048 } 2049 /* 2050 * TODO: should try to update w_row here, to avoid recomputing it later. 2051 */ 2052 } 2053 2054 /* 2055 * Insert a string at the cursor position. 2056 * Note: Does NOT handle Replace mode. 2057 * Caller must have prepared for undo. 2058 */ 2059 void 2060 ins_str(s) 2061 char_u *s; 2062 { 2063 char_u *oldp, *newp; 2064 int newlen = (int)STRLEN(s); 2065 int oldlen; 2066 colnr_T col; 2067 linenr_T lnum = curwin->w_cursor.lnum; 2068 2069 #ifdef FEAT_VIRTUALEDIT 2070 if (virtual_active() && curwin->w_cursor.coladd > 0) 2071 coladvance_force(getviscol()); 2072 #endif 2073 2074 col = curwin->w_cursor.col; 2075 oldp = ml_get(lnum); 2076 oldlen = (int)STRLEN(oldp); 2077 2078 newp = alloc_check((unsigned)(oldlen + newlen + 1)); 2079 if (newp == NULL) 2080 return; 2081 if (col > 0) 2082 mch_memmove(newp, oldp, (size_t)col); 2083 mch_memmove(newp + col, s, (size_t)newlen); 2084 mch_memmove(newp + col + newlen, oldp + col, (size_t)(oldlen - col + 1)); 2085 ml_replace(lnum, newp, FALSE); 2086 changed_bytes(lnum, col); 2087 curwin->w_cursor.col += newlen; 2088 } 2089 2090 /* 2091 * Delete one character under the cursor. 2092 * If "fixpos" is TRUE, don't leave the cursor on the NUL after the line. 2093 * Caller must have prepared for undo. 2094 * 2095 * return FAIL for failure, OK otherwise 2096 */ 2097 int 2098 del_char(fixpos) 2099 int fixpos; 2100 { 2101 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE 2102 if (has_mbyte) 2103 { 2104 /* Make sure the cursor is at the start of a character. */ 2105 mb_adjust_cursor(); 2106 if (*ml_get_cursor() == NUL) 2107 return FAIL; 2108 return del_chars(1L, fixpos); 2109 } 2110 #endif 2111 return del_bytes(1L, fixpos, TRUE); 2112 } 2113 2114 #if defined(FEAT_MBYTE) || defined(PROTO) 2115 /* 2116 * Like del_bytes(), but delete characters instead of bytes. 2117 */ 2118 int 2119 del_chars(count, fixpos) 2120 long count; 2121 int fixpos; 2122 { 2123 long bytes = 0; 2124 long i; 2125 char_u *p; 2126 int l; 2127 2128 p = ml_get_cursor(); 2129 for (i = 0; i < count && *p != NUL; ++i) 2130 { 2131 l = (*mb_ptr2len)(p); 2132 bytes += l; 2133 p += l; 2134 } 2135 return del_bytes(bytes, fixpos, TRUE); 2136 } 2137 #endif 2138 2139 /* 2140 * Delete "count" bytes under the cursor. 2141 * If "fixpos" is TRUE, don't leave the cursor on the NUL after the line. 2142 * Caller must have prepared for undo. 2143 * 2144 * return FAIL for failure, OK otherwise 2145 */ 2146 /*ARGSUSED*/ 2147 int 2148 del_bytes(count, fixpos_arg, use_delcombine) 2149 long count; 2150 int fixpos_arg; 2151 int use_delcombine; /* 'delcombine' option applies */ 2152 { 2153 char_u *oldp, *newp; 2154 colnr_T oldlen; 2155 linenr_T lnum = curwin->w_cursor.lnum; 2156 colnr_T col = curwin->w_cursor.col; 2157 int was_alloced; 2158 long movelen; 2159 int fixpos = fixpos_arg; 2160 2161 oldp = ml_get(lnum); 2162 oldlen = (int)STRLEN(oldp); 2163 2164 /* 2165 * Can't do anything when the cursor is on the NUL after the line. 2166 */ 2167 if (col >= oldlen) 2168 return FAIL; 2169 2170 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE 2171 /* If 'delcombine' is set and deleting (less than) one character, only 2172 * delete the last combining character. */ 2173 if (p_deco && use_delcombine && enc_utf8 2174 && utfc_ptr2len(oldp + col) >= count) 2175 { 2176 int cc[MAX_MCO]; 2177 int n; 2178 2179 (void)utfc_ptr2char(oldp + col, cc); 2180 if (cc[0] != NUL) 2181 { 2182 /* Find the last composing char, there can be several. */ 2183 n = col; 2184 do 2185 { 2186 col = n; 2187 count = utf_ptr2len(oldp + n); 2188 n += count; 2189 } while (UTF_COMPOSINGLIKE(oldp + col, oldp + n)); 2190 fixpos = 0; 2191 } 2192 } 2193 #endif 2194 2195 /* 2196 * When count is too big, reduce it. 2197 */ 2198 movelen = (long)oldlen - (long)col - count + 1; /* includes trailing NUL */ 2199 if (movelen <= 1) 2200 { 2201 /* 2202 * If we just took off the last character of a non-blank line, and 2203 * fixpos is TRUE, we don't want to end up positioned at the NUL, 2204 * unless "restart_edit" is set or 'virtualedit' contains "onemore". 2205 */ 2206 if (col > 0 && fixpos && restart_edit == 0 2207 #ifdef FEAT_VIRTUALEDIT 2208 && (ve_flags & VE_ONEMORE) == 0 2209 #endif 2210 ) 2211 { 2212 --curwin->w_cursor.col; 2213 #ifdef FEAT_VIRTUALEDIT 2214 curwin->w_cursor.coladd = 0; 2215 #endif 2216 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE 2217 if (has_mbyte) 2218 curwin->w_cursor.col -= 2219 (*mb_head_off)(oldp, oldp + curwin->w_cursor.col); 2220 #endif 2221 } 2222 count = oldlen - col; 2223 movelen = 1; 2224 } 2225 2226 /* 2227 * If the old line has been allocated the deletion can be done in the 2228 * existing line. Otherwise a new line has to be allocated 2229 */ 2230 was_alloced = ml_line_alloced(); /* check if oldp was allocated */ 2231 #ifdef FEAT_NETBEANS_INTG 2232 if (was_alloced && usingNetbeans) 2233 netbeans_removed(curbuf, lnum, col, count); 2234 /* else is handled by ml_replace() */ 2235 #endif 2236 if (was_alloced) 2237 newp = oldp; /* use same allocated memory */ 2238 else 2239 { /* need to allocate a new line */ 2240 newp = alloc((unsigned)(oldlen + 1 - count)); 2241 if (newp == NULL) 2242 return FAIL; 2243 mch_memmove(newp, oldp, (size_t)col); 2244 } 2245 mch_memmove(newp + col, oldp + col + count, (size_t)movelen); 2246 if (!was_alloced) 2247 ml_replace(lnum, newp, FALSE); 2248 2249 /* mark the buffer as changed and prepare for displaying */ 2250 changed_bytes(lnum, curwin->w_cursor.col); 2251 2252 return OK; 2253 } 2254 2255 /* 2256 * Delete from cursor to end of line. 2257 * Caller must have prepared for undo. 2258 * 2259 * return FAIL for failure, OK otherwise 2260 */ 2261 int 2262 truncate_line(fixpos) 2263 int fixpos; /* if TRUE fix the cursor position when done */ 2264 { 2265 char_u *newp; 2266 linenr_T lnum = curwin->w_cursor.lnum; 2267 colnr_T col = curwin->w_cursor.col; 2268 2269 if (col == 0) 2270 newp = vim_strsave((char_u *)""); 2271 else 2272 newp = vim_strnsave(ml_get(lnum), col); 2273 2274 if (newp == NULL) 2275 return FAIL; 2276 2277 ml_replace(lnum, newp, FALSE); 2278 2279 /* mark the buffer as changed and prepare for displaying */ 2280 changed_bytes(lnum, curwin->w_cursor.col); 2281 2282 /* 2283 * If "fixpos" is TRUE we don't want to end up positioned at the NUL. 2284 */ 2285 if (fixpos && curwin->w_cursor.col > 0) 2286 --curwin->w_cursor.col; 2287 2288 return OK; 2289 } 2290 2291 /* 2292 * Delete "nlines" lines at the cursor. 2293 * Saves the lines for undo first if "undo" is TRUE. 2294 */ 2295 void 2296 del_lines(nlines, undo) 2297 long nlines; /* number of lines to delete */ 2298 int undo; /* if TRUE, prepare for undo */ 2299 { 2300 long n; 2301 2302 if (nlines <= 0) 2303 return; 2304 2305 /* save the deleted lines for undo */ 2306 if (undo && u_savedel(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, nlines) == FAIL) 2307 return; 2308 2309 for (n = 0; n < nlines; ) 2310 { 2311 if (curbuf->b_ml.ml_flags & ML_EMPTY) /* nothing to delete */ 2312 break; 2313 2314 ml_delete(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, TRUE); 2315 ++n; 2316 2317 /* If we delete the last line in the file, stop */ 2318 if (curwin->w_cursor.lnum > curbuf->b_ml.ml_line_count) 2319 break; 2320 } 2321 /* adjust marks, mark the buffer as changed and prepare for displaying */ 2322 deleted_lines_mark(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, n); 2323 2324 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0; 2325 check_cursor_lnum(); 2326 } 2327 2328 int 2329 gchar_pos(pos) 2330 pos_T *pos; 2331 { 2332 char_u *ptr = ml_get_pos(pos); 2333 2334 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE 2335 if (has_mbyte) 2336 return (*mb_ptr2char)(ptr); 2337 #endif 2338 return (int)*ptr; 2339 } 2340 2341 int 2342 gchar_cursor() 2343 { 2344 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE 2345 if (has_mbyte) 2346 return (*mb_ptr2char)(ml_get_cursor()); 2347 #endif 2348 return (int)*ml_get_cursor(); 2349 } 2350 2351 /* 2352 * Write a character at the current cursor position. 2353 * It is directly written into the block. 2354 */ 2355 void 2356 pchar_cursor(c) 2357 int c; 2358 { 2359 *(ml_get_buf(curbuf, curwin->w_cursor.lnum, TRUE) 2360 + curwin->w_cursor.col) = c; 2361 } 2362 2363 #if 0 /* not used */ 2364 /* 2365 * Put *pos at end of current buffer 2366 */ 2367 void 2368 goto_endofbuf(pos) 2369 pos_T *pos; 2370 { 2371 char_u *p; 2372 2373 pos->lnum = curbuf->b_ml.ml_line_count; 2374 pos->col = 0; 2375 p = ml_get(pos->lnum); 2376 while (*p++) 2377 ++pos->col; 2378 } 2379 #endif 2380 2381 /* 2382 * When extra == 0: Return TRUE if the cursor is before or on the first 2383 * non-blank in the line. 2384 * When extra == 1: Return TRUE if the cursor is before the first non-blank in 2385 * the line. 2386 */ 2387 int 2388 inindent(extra) 2389 int extra; 2390 { 2391 char_u *ptr; 2392 colnr_T col; 2393 2394 for (col = 0, ptr = ml_get_curline(); vim_iswhite(*ptr); ++col) 2395 ++ptr; 2396 if (col >= curwin->w_cursor.col + extra) 2397 return TRUE; 2398 else 2399 return FALSE; 2400 } 2401 2402 /* 2403 * Skip to next part of an option argument: Skip space and comma. 2404 */ 2405 char_u * 2406 skip_to_option_part(p) 2407 char_u *p; 2408 { 2409 if (*p == ',') 2410 ++p; 2411 while (*p == ' ') 2412 ++p; 2413 return p; 2414 } 2415 2416 /* 2417 * changed() is called when something in the current buffer is changed. 2418 * 2419 * Most often called through changed_bytes() and changed_lines(), which also 2420 * mark the area of the display to be redrawn. 2421 */ 2422 void 2423 changed() 2424 { 2425 #if defined(FEAT_XIM) && defined(FEAT_GUI_GTK) 2426 /* The text of the preediting area is inserted, but this doesn't 2427 * mean a change of the buffer yet. That is delayed until the 2428 * text is committed. (this means preedit becomes empty) */ 2429 if (im_is_preediting() && !xim_changed_while_preediting) 2430 return; 2431 xim_changed_while_preediting = FALSE; 2432 #endif 2433 2434 if (!curbuf->b_changed) 2435 { 2436 int save_msg_scroll = msg_scroll; 2437 2438 /* Give a warning about changing a read-only file. This may also 2439 * check-out the file, thus change "curbuf"! */ 2440 change_warning(0); 2441 2442 /* Create a swap file if that is wanted. 2443 * Don't do this for "nofile" and "nowrite" buffer types. */ 2444 if (curbuf->b_may_swap 2445 #ifdef FEAT_QUICKFIX 2446 && !bt_dontwrite(curbuf) 2447 #endif 2448 ) 2449 { 2450 ml_open_file(curbuf); 2451 2452 /* The ml_open_file() can cause an ATTENTION message. 2453 * Wait two seconds, to make sure the user reads this unexpected 2454 * message. Since we could be anywhere, call wait_return() now, 2455 * and don't let the emsg() set msg_scroll. */ 2456 if (need_wait_return && emsg_silent == 0) 2457 { 2458 out_flush(); 2459 ui_delay(2000L, TRUE); 2460 wait_return(TRUE); 2461 msg_scroll = save_msg_scroll; 2462 } 2463 } 2464 curbuf->b_changed = TRUE; 2465 ml_setflags(curbuf); 2466 #ifdef FEAT_WINDOWS 2467 check_status(curbuf); 2468 redraw_tabline = TRUE; 2469 #endif 2470 #ifdef FEAT_TITLE 2471 need_maketitle = TRUE; /* set window title later */ 2472 #endif 2473 } 2474 ++curbuf->b_changedtick; 2475 } 2476 2477 static void changedOneline __ARGS((buf_T *buf, linenr_T lnum)); 2478 static void changed_lines_buf __ARGS((buf_T *buf, linenr_T lnum, linenr_T lnume, long xtra)); 2479 static void changed_common __ARGS((linenr_T lnum, colnr_T col, linenr_T lnume, long xtra)); 2480 2481 /* 2482 * Changed bytes within a single line for the current buffer. 2483 * - marks the windows on this buffer to be redisplayed 2484 * - marks the buffer changed by calling changed() 2485 * - invalidates cached values 2486 */ 2487 void 2488 changed_bytes(lnum, col) 2489 linenr_T lnum; 2490 colnr_T col; 2491 { 2492 changedOneline(curbuf, lnum); 2493 changed_common(lnum, col, lnum + 1, 0L); 2494 2495 #ifdef FEAT_DIFF 2496 /* Diff highlighting in other diff windows may need to be updated too. */ 2497 if (curwin->w_p_diff) 2498 { 2499 win_T *wp; 2500 linenr_T wlnum; 2501 2502 for (wp = firstwin; wp != NULL; wp = wp->w_next) 2503 if (wp->w_p_diff && wp != curwin) 2504 { 2505 redraw_win_later(wp, VALID); 2506 wlnum = diff_lnum_win(lnum, wp); 2507 if (wlnum > 0) 2508 changedOneline(wp->w_buffer, wlnum); 2509 } 2510 } 2511 #endif 2512 } 2513 2514 static void 2515 changedOneline(buf, lnum) 2516 buf_T *buf; 2517 linenr_T lnum; 2518 { 2519 if (buf->b_mod_set) 2520 { 2521 /* find the maximum area that must be redisplayed */ 2522 if (lnum < buf->b_mod_top) 2523 buf->b_mod_top = lnum; 2524 else if (lnum >= buf->b_mod_bot) 2525 buf->b_mod_bot = lnum + 1; 2526 } 2527 else 2528 { 2529 /* set the area that must be redisplayed to one line */ 2530 buf->b_mod_set = TRUE; 2531 buf->b_mod_top = lnum; 2532 buf->b_mod_bot = lnum + 1; 2533 buf->b_mod_xlines = 0; 2534 } 2535 } 2536 2537 /* 2538 * Appended "count" lines below line "lnum" in the current buffer. 2539 * Must be called AFTER the change and after mark_adjust(). 2540 * Takes care of marking the buffer to be redrawn and sets the changed flag. 2541 */ 2542 void 2543 appended_lines(lnum, count) 2544 linenr_T lnum; 2545 long count; 2546 { 2547 changed_lines(lnum + 1, 0, lnum + 1, count); 2548 } 2549 2550 /* 2551 * Like appended_lines(), but adjust marks first. 2552 */ 2553 void 2554 appended_lines_mark(lnum, count) 2555 linenr_T lnum; 2556 long count; 2557 { 2558 mark_adjust(lnum + 1, (linenr_T)MAXLNUM, count, 0L); 2559 changed_lines(lnum + 1, 0, lnum + 1, count); 2560 } 2561 2562 /* 2563 * Deleted "count" lines at line "lnum" in the current buffer. 2564 * Must be called AFTER the change and after mark_adjust(). 2565 * Takes care of marking the buffer to be redrawn and sets the changed flag. 2566 */ 2567 void 2568 deleted_lines(lnum, count) 2569 linenr_T lnum; 2570 long count; 2571 { 2572 changed_lines(lnum, 0, lnum + count, -count); 2573 } 2574 2575 /* 2576 * Like deleted_lines(), but adjust marks first. 2577 */ 2578 void 2579 deleted_lines_mark(lnum, count) 2580 linenr_T lnum; 2581 long count; 2582 { 2583 mark_adjust(lnum, (linenr_T)(lnum + count - 1), (long)MAXLNUM, -count); 2584 changed_lines(lnum, 0, lnum + count, -count); 2585 } 2586 2587 /* 2588 * Changed lines for the current buffer. 2589 * Must be called AFTER the change and after mark_adjust(). 2590 * - mark the buffer changed by calling changed() 2591 * - mark the windows on this buffer to be redisplayed 2592 * - invalidate cached values 2593 * "lnum" is the first line that needs displaying, "lnume" the first line 2594 * below the changed lines (BEFORE the change). 2595 * When only inserting lines, "lnum" and "lnume" are equal. 2596 * Takes care of calling changed() and updating b_mod_*. 2597 */ 2598 void 2599 changed_lines(lnum, col, lnume, xtra) 2600 linenr_T lnum; /* first line with change */ 2601 colnr_T col; /* column in first line with change */ 2602 linenr_T lnume; /* line below last changed line */ 2603 long xtra; /* number of extra lines (negative when deleting) */ 2604 { 2605 changed_lines_buf(curbuf, lnum, lnume, xtra); 2606 2607 #ifdef FEAT_DIFF 2608 if (xtra == 0 && curwin->w_p_diff) 2609 { 2610 /* When the number of lines doesn't change then mark_adjust() isn't 2611 * called and other diff buffers still need to be marked for 2612 * displaying. */ 2613 win_T *wp; 2614 linenr_T wlnum; 2615 2616 for (wp = firstwin; wp != NULL; wp = wp->w_next) 2617 if (wp->w_p_diff && wp != curwin) 2618 { 2619 redraw_win_later(wp, VALID); 2620 wlnum = diff_lnum_win(lnum, wp); 2621 if (wlnum > 0) 2622 changed_lines_buf(wp->w_buffer, wlnum, 2623 lnume - lnum + wlnum, 0L); 2624 } 2625 } 2626 #endif 2627 2628 changed_common(lnum, col, lnume, xtra); 2629 } 2630 2631 static void 2632 changed_lines_buf(buf, lnum, lnume, xtra) 2633 buf_T *buf; 2634 linenr_T lnum; /* first line with change */ 2635 linenr_T lnume; /* line below last changed line */ 2636 long xtra; /* number of extra lines (negative when deleting) */ 2637 { 2638 if (buf->b_mod_set) 2639 { 2640 /* find the maximum area that must be redisplayed */ 2641 if (lnum < buf->b_mod_top) 2642 buf->b_mod_top = lnum; 2643 if (lnum < buf->b_mod_bot) 2644 { 2645 /* adjust old bot position for xtra lines */ 2646 buf->b_mod_bot += xtra; 2647 if (buf->b_mod_bot < lnum) 2648 buf->b_mod_bot = lnum; 2649 } 2650 if (lnume + xtra > buf->b_mod_bot) 2651 buf->b_mod_bot = lnume + xtra; 2652 buf->b_mod_xlines += xtra; 2653 } 2654 else 2655 { 2656 /* set the area that must be redisplayed */ 2657 buf->b_mod_set = TRUE; 2658 buf->b_mod_top = lnum; 2659 buf->b_mod_bot = lnume + xtra; 2660 buf->b_mod_xlines = xtra; 2661 } 2662 } 2663 2664 static void 2665 changed_common(lnum, col, lnume, xtra) 2666 linenr_T lnum; 2667 colnr_T col; 2668 linenr_T lnume; 2669 long xtra; 2670 { 2671 win_T *wp; 2672 int i; 2673 #ifdef FEAT_JUMPLIST 2674 int cols; 2675 pos_T *p; 2676 int add; 2677 #endif 2678 2679 /* mark the buffer as modified */ 2680 changed(); 2681 2682 /* set the '. mark */ 2683 if (!cmdmod.keepjumps) 2684 { 2685 curbuf->b_last_change.lnum = lnum; 2686 curbuf->b_last_change.col = col; 2687 2688 #ifdef FEAT_JUMPLIST 2689 /* Create a new entry if a new undo-able change was started or we 2690 * don't have an entry yet. */ 2691 if (curbuf->b_new_change || curbuf->b_changelistlen == 0) 2692 { 2693 if (curbuf->b_changelistlen == 0) 2694 add = TRUE; 2695 else 2696 { 2697 /* Don't create a new entry when the line number is the same 2698 * as the last one and the column is not too far away. Avoids 2699 * creating many entries for typing "xxxxx". */ 2700 p = &curbuf->b_changelist[curbuf->b_changelistlen - 1]; 2701 if (p->lnum != lnum) 2702 add = TRUE; 2703 else 2704 { 2705 cols = comp_textwidth(FALSE); 2706 if (cols == 0) 2707 cols = 79; 2708 add = (p->col + cols < col || col + cols < p->col); 2709 } 2710 } 2711 if (add) 2712 { 2713 /* This is the first of a new sequence of undo-able changes 2714 * and it's at some distance of the last change. Use a new 2715 * position in the changelist. */ 2716 curbuf->b_new_change = FALSE; 2717 2718 if (curbuf->b_changelistlen == JUMPLISTSIZE) 2719 { 2720 /* changelist is full: remove oldest entry */ 2721 curbuf->b_changelistlen = JUMPLISTSIZE - 1; 2722 mch_memmove(curbuf->b_changelist, curbuf->b_changelist + 1, 2723 sizeof(pos_T) * (JUMPLISTSIZE - 1)); 2724 FOR_ALL_WINDOWS(wp) 2725 { 2726 /* Correct position in changelist for other windows on 2727 * this buffer. */ 2728 if (wp->w_buffer == curbuf && wp->w_changelistidx > 0) 2729 --wp->w_changelistidx; 2730 } 2731 } 2732 FOR_ALL_WINDOWS(wp) 2733 { 2734 /* For other windows, if the position in the changelist is 2735 * at the end it stays at the end. */ 2736 if (wp->w_buffer == curbuf 2737 && wp->w_changelistidx == curbuf->b_changelistlen) 2738 ++wp->w_changelistidx; 2739 } 2740 ++curbuf->b_changelistlen; 2741 } 2742 } 2743 curbuf->b_changelist[curbuf->b_changelistlen - 1] = 2744 curbuf->b_last_change; 2745 /* The current window is always after the last change, so that "g," 2746 * takes you back to it. */ 2747 curwin->w_changelistidx = curbuf->b_changelistlen; 2748 #endif 2749 } 2750 2751 FOR_ALL_WINDOWS(wp) 2752 { 2753 if (wp->w_buffer == curbuf) 2754 { 2755 /* Mark this window to be redrawn later. */ 2756 if (wp->w_redr_type < VALID) 2757 wp->w_redr_type = VALID; 2758 2759 /* Check if a change in the buffer has invalidated the cached 2760 * values for the cursor. */ 2761 #ifdef FEAT_FOLDING 2762 /* 2763 * Update the folds for this window. Can't postpone this, because 2764 * a following operator might work on the whole fold: ">>dd". 2765 */ 2766 foldUpdate(wp, lnum, lnume + xtra - 1); 2767 2768 /* The change may cause lines above or below the change to become 2769 * included in a fold. Set lnum/lnume to the first/last line that 2770 * might be displayed differently. 2771 * Set w_cline_folded here as an efficient way to update it when 2772 * inserting lines just above a closed fold. */ 2773 i = hasFoldingWin(wp, lnum, &lnum, NULL, FALSE, NULL); 2774 if (wp->w_cursor.lnum == lnum) 2775 wp->w_cline_folded = i; 2776 i = hasFoldingWin(wp, lnume, NULL, &lnume, FALSE, NULL); 2777 if (wp->w_cursor.lnum == lnume) 2778 wp->w_cline_folded = i; 2779 2780 /* If the changed line is in a range of previously folded lines, 2781 * compare with the first line in that range. */ 2782 if (wp->w_cursor.lnum <= lnum) 2783 { 2784 i = find_wl_entry(wp, lnum); 2785 if (i >= 0 && wp->w_cursor.lnum > wp->w_lines[i].wl_lnum) 2786 changed_line_abv_curs_win(wp); 2787 } 2788 #endif 2789 2790 if (wp->w_cursor.lnum > lnum) 2791 changed_line_abv_curs_win(wp); 2792 else if (wp->w_cursor.lnum == lnum && wp->w_cursor.col >= col) 2793 changed_cline_bef_curs_win(wp); 2794 if (wp->w_botline >= lnum) 2795 { 2796 /* Assume that botline doesn't change (inserted lines make 2797 * other lines scroll down below botline). */ 2798 approximate_botline_win(wp); 2799 } 2800 2801 /* Check if any w_lines[] entries have become invalid. 2802 * For entries below the change: Correct the lnums for 2803 * inserted/deleted lines. Makes it possible to stop displaying 2804 * after the change. */ 2805 for (i = 0; i < wp->w_lines_valid; ++i) 2806 if (wp->w_lines[i].wl_valid) 2807 { 2808 if (wp->w_lines[i].wl_lnum >= lnum) 2809 { 2810 if (wp->w_lines[i].wl_lnum < lnume) 2811 { 2812 /* line included in change */ 2813 wp->w_lines[i].wl_valid = FALSE; 2814 } 2815 else if (xtra != 0) 2816 { 2817 /* line below change */ 2818 wp->w_lines[i].wl_lnum += xtra; 2819 #ifdef FEAT_FOLDING 2820 wp->w_lines[i].wl_lastlnum += xtra; 2821 #endif 2822 } 2823 } 2824 #ifdef FEAT_FOLDING 2825 else if (wp->w_lines[i].wl_lastlnum >= lnum) 2826 { 2827 /* change somewhere inside this range of folded lines, 2828 * may need to be redrawn */ 2829 wp->w_lines[i].wl_valid = FALSE; 2830 } 2831 #endif 2832 } 2833 } 2834 } 2835 2836 /* Call update_screen() later, which checks out what needs to be redrawn, 2837 * since it notices b_mod_set and then uses b_mod_*. */ 2838 if (must_redraw < VALID) 2839 must_redraw = VALID; 2840 2841 #ifdef FEAT_AUTOCMD 2842 /* when the cursor line is changed always trigger CursorMoved */ 2843 if (lnum <= curwin->w_cursor.lnum 2844 && lnume + (xtra < 0 ? -xtra : xtra) > curwin->w_cursor.lnum) 2845 last_cursormoved.lnum = 0; 2846 #endif 2847 } 2848 2849 /* 2850 * unchanged() is called when the changed flag must be reset for buffer 'buf' 2851 */ 2852 void 2853 unchanged(buf, ff) 2854 buf_T *buf; 2855 int ff; /* also reset 'fileformat' */ 2856 { 2857 if (buf->b_changed || (ff && file_ff_differs(buf))) 2858 { 2859 buf->b_changed = 0; 2860 ml_setflags(buf); 2861 if (ff) 2862 save_file_ff(buf); 2863 #ifdef FEAT_WINDOWS 2864 check_status(buf); 2865 redraw_tabline = TRUE; 2866 #endif 2867 #ifdef FEAT_TITLE 2868 need_maketitle = TRUE; /* set window title later */ 2869 #endif 2870 } 2871 ++buf->b_changedtick; 2872 #ifdef FEAT_NETBEANS_INTG 2873 netbeans_unmodified(buf); 2874 #endif 2875 } 2876 2877 #if defined(FEAT_WINDOWS) || defined(PROTO) 2878 /* 2879 * check_status: called when the status bars for the buffer 'buf' 2880 * need to be updated 2881 */ 2882 void 2883 check_status(buf) 2884 buf_T *buf; 2885 { 2886 win_T *wp; 2887 2888 for (wp = firstwin; wp != NULL; wp = wp->w_next) 2889 if (wp->w_buffer == buf && wp->w_status_height) 2890 { 2891 wp->w_redr_status = TRUE; 2892 if (must_redraw < VALID) 2893 must_redraw = VALID; 2894 } 2895 } 2896 #endif 2897 2898 /* 2899 * If the file is readonly, give a warning message with the first change. 2900 * Don't do this for autocommands. 2901 * Don't use emsg(), because it flushes the macro buffer. 2902 * If we have undone all changes b_changed will be FALSE, but "b_did_warn" 2903 * will be TRUE. 2904 */ 2905 void 2906 change_warning(col) 2907 int col; /* column for message; non-zero when in insert 2908 mode and 'showmode' is on */ 2909 { 2910 if (curbuf->b_did_warn == FALSE 2911 && curbufIsChanged() == 0 2912 #ifdef FEAT_AUTOCMD 2913 && !autocmd_busy 2914 #endif 2915 && curbuf->b_p_ro) 2916 { 2917 #ifdef FEAT_AUTOCMD 2918 ++curbuf_lock; 2919 apply_autocmds(EVENT_FILECHANGEDRO, NULL, NULL, FALSE, curbuf); 2920 --curbuf_lock; 2921 if (!curbuf->b_p_ro) 2922 return; 2923 #endif 2924 /* 2925 * Do what msg() does, but with a column offset if the warning should 2926 * be after the mode message. 2927 */ 2928 msg_start(); 2929 if (msg_row == Rows - 1) 2930 msg_col = col; 2931 msg_source(hl_attr(HLF_W)); 2932 MSG_PUTS_ATTR(_("W10: Warning: Changing a readonly file"), 2933 hl_attr(HLF_W) | MSG_HIST); 2934 msg_clr_eos(); 2935 (void)msg_end(); 2936 if (msg_silent == 0 && !silent_mode) 2937 { 2938 out_flush(); 2939 ui_delay(1000L, TRUE); /* give the user time to think about it */ 2940 } 2941 curbuf->b_did_warn = TRUE; 2942 redraw_cmdline = FALSE; /* don't redraw and erase the message */ 2943 if (msg_row < Rows - 1) 2944 showmode(); 2945 } 2946 } 2947 2948 /* 2949 * Ask for a reply from the user, a 'y' or a 'n'. 2950 * No other characters are accepted, the message is repeated until a valid 2951 * reply is entered or CTRL-C is hit. 2952 * If direct is TRUE, don't use vgetc() but ui_inchar(), don't get characters 2953 * from any buffers but directly from the user. 2954 * 2955 * return the 'y' or 'n' 2956 */ 2957 int 2958 ask_yesno(str, direct) 2959 char_u *str; 2960 int direct; 2961 { 2962 int r = ' '; 2963 int save_State = State; 2964 2965 if (exiting) /* put terminal in raw mode for this question */ 2966 settmode(TMODE_RAW); 2967 ++no_wait_return; 2968 #ifdef USE_ON_FLY_SCROLL 2969 dont_scroll = TRUE; /* disallow scrolling here */ 2970 #endif 2971 State = CONFIRM; /* mouse behaves like with :confirm */ 2972 #ifdef FEAT_MOUSE 2973 setmouse(); /* disables mouse for xterm */ 2974 #endif 2975 ++no_mapping; 2976 ++allow_keys; /* no mapping here, but recognize keys */ 2977 2978 while (r != 'y' && r != 'n') 2979 { 2980 /* same highlighting as for wait_return */ 2981 smsg_attr(hl_attr(HLF_R), (char_u *)"%s (y/n)?", str); 2982 if (direct) 2983 r = get_keystroke(); 2984 else 2985 r = safe_vgetc(); 2986 if (r == Ctrl_C || r == ESC) 2987 r = 'n'; 2988 msg_putchar(r); /* show what you typed */ 2989 out_flush(); 2990 } 2991 --no_wait_return; 2992 State = save_State; 2993 #ifdef FEAT_MOUSE 2994 setmouse(); 2995 #endif 2996 --no_mapping; 2997 --allow_keys; 2998 2999 return r; 3000 } 3001 3002 /* 3003 * Get a key stroke directly from the user. 3004 * Ignores mouse clicks and scrollbar events, except a click for the left 3005 * button (used at the more prompt). 3006 * Doesn't use vgetc(), because it syncs undo and eats mapped characters. 3007 * Disadvantage: typeahead is ignored. 3008 * Translates the interrupt character for unix to ESC. 3009 */ 3010 int 3011 get_keystroke() 3012 { 3013 #define CBUFLEN 151 3014 char_u buf[CBUFLEN]; 3015 int len = 0; 3016 int n; 3017 int save_mapped_ctrl_c = mapped_ctrl_c; 3018 int waited = 0; 3019 3020 mapped_ctrl_c = FALSE; /* mappings are not used here */ 3021 for (;;) 3022 { 3023 cursor_on(); 3024 out_flush(); 3025 3026 /* First time: blocking wait. Second time: wait up to 100ms for a 3027 * terminal code to complete. Leave some room for check_termcode() to 3028 * insert a key code into (max 5 chars plus NUL). And 3029 * fix_input_buffer() can triple the number of bytes. */ 3030 n = ui_inchar(buf + len, (CBUFLEN - 6 - len) / 3, 3031 len == 0 ? -1L : 100L, 0); 3032 if (n > 0) 3033 { 3034 /* Replace zero and CSI by a special key code. */ 3035 n = fix_input_buffer(buf + len, n, FALSE); 3036 len += n; 3037 waited = 0; 3038 } 3039 else if (len > 0) 3040 ++waited; /* keep track of the waiting time */ 3041 3042 /* Incomplete termcode and not timed out yet: get more characters */ 3043 if ((n = check_termcode(1, buf, len)) < 0 3044 && (!p_ttimeout || waited * 100L < (p_ttm < 0 ? p_tm : p_ttm))) 3045 continue; 3046 3047 /* found a termcode: adjust length */ 3048 if (n > 0) 3049 len = n; 3050 if (len == 0) /* nothing typed yet */ 3051 continue; 3052 3053 /* Handle modifier and/or special key code. */ 3054 n = buf[0]; 3055 if (n == K_SPECIAL) 3056 { 3057 n = TO_SPECIAL(buf[1], buf[2]); 3058 if (buf[1] == KS_MODIFIER 3059 || n == K_IGNORE 3060 #ifdef FEAT_MOUSE 3061 || n == K_LEFTMOUSE_NM 3062 || n == K_LEFTDRAG 3063 || n == K_LEFTRELEASE 3064 || n == K_LEFTRELEASE_NM 3065 || n == K_MIDDLEMOUSE 3066 || n == K_MIDDLEDRAG 3067 || n == K_MIDDLERELEASE 3068 || n == K_RIGHTMOUSE 3069 || n == K_RIGHTDRAG 3070 || n == K_RIGHTRELEASE 3071 || n == K_MOUSEDOWN 3072 || n == K_MOUSEUP 3073 || n == K_X1MOUSE 3074 || n == K_X1DRAG 3075 || n == K_X1RELEASE 3076 || n == K_X2MOUSE 3077 || n == K_X2DRAG 3078 || n == K_X2RELEASE 3079 # ifdef FEAT_GUI 3080 || n == K_VER_SCROLLBAR 3081 || n == K_HOR_SCROLLBAR 3082 # endif 3083 #endif 3084 ) 3085 { 3086 if (buf[1] == KS_MODIFIER) 3087 mod_mask = buf[2]; 3088 len -= 3; 3089 if (len > 0) 3090 mch_memmove(buf, buf + 3, (size_t)len); 3091 continue; 3092 } 3093 break; 3094 } 3095 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE 3096 if (has_mbyte) 3097 { 3098 if (MB_BYTE2LEN(n) > len) 3099 continue; /* more bytes to get */ 3100 buf[len >= CBUFLEN ? CBUFLEN - 1 : len] = NUL; 3101 n = (*mb_ptr2char)(buf); 3102 } 3103 #endif 3104 #ifdef UNIX 3105 if (n == intr_char) 3106 n = ESC; 3107 #endif 3108 break; 3109 } 3110 3111 mapped_ctrl_c = save_mapped_ctrl_c; 3112 return n; 3113 } 3114 3115 /* 3116 * Get a number from the user. 3117 * When "mouse_used" is not NULL allow using the mouse. 3118 */ 3119 int 3120 get_number(colon, mouse_used) 3121 int colon; /* allow colon to abort */ 3122 int *mouse_used; 3123 { 3124 int n = 0; 3125 int c; 3126 int typed = 0; 3127 3128 if (mouse_used != NULL) 3129 *mouse_used = FALSE; 3130 3131 /* When not printing messages, the user won't know what to type, return a 3132 * zero (as if CR was hit). */ 3133 if (msg_silent != 0) 3134 return 0; 3135 3136 #ifdef USE_ON_FLY_SCROLL 3137 dont_scroll = TRUE; /* disallow scrolling here */ 3138 #endif 3139 ++no_mapping; 3140 ++allow_keys; /* no mapping here, but recognize keys */ 3141 for (;;) 3142 { 3143 windgoto(msg_row, msg_col); 3144 c = safe_vgetc(); 3145 if (VIM_ISDIGIT(c)) 3146 { 3147 n = n * 10 + c - '0'; 3148 msg_putchar(c); 3149 ++typed; 3150 } 3151 else if (c == K_DEL || c == K_KDEL || c == K_BS || c == Ctrl_H) 3152 { 3153 if (typed > 0) 3154 { 3155 MSG_PUTS("\b \b"); 3156 --typed; 3157 } 3158 n /= 10; 3159 } 3160 #ifdef FEAT_MOUSE 3161 else if (mouse_used != NULL && c == K_LEFTMOUSE) 3162 { 3163 *mouse_used = TRUE; 3164 n = mouse_row + 1; 3165 break; 3166 } 3167 #endif 3168 else if (n == 0 && c == ':' && colon) 3169 { 3170 stuffcharReadbuff(':'); 3171 if (!exmode_active) 3172 cmdline_row = msg_row; 3173 skip_redraw = TRUE; /* skip redraw once */ 3174 do_redraw = FALSE; 3175 break; 3176 } 3177 else if (c == CAR || c == NL || c == Ctrl_C || c == ESC) 3178 break; 3179 } 3180 --no_mapping; 3181 --allow_keys; 3182 return n; 3183 } 3184 3185 /* 3186 * Ask the user to enter a number. 3187 * When "mouse_used" is not NULL allow using the mouse and in that case return 3188 * the line number. 3189 */ 3190 int 3191 prompt_for_number(mouse_used) 3192 int *mouse_used; 3193 { 3194 int i; 3195 int save_cmdline_row; 3196 int save_State; 3197 3198 /* When using ":silent" assume that <CR> was entered. */ 3199 if (mouse_used != NULL) 3200 MSG_PUTS(_("Type number or click with mouse (<Enter> cancels): ")); 3201 else 3202 MSG_PUTS(_("Choice number (<Enter> cancels): ")); 3203 3204 /* Set the state such that text can be selected/copied/pasted and we still 3205 * get mouse events. */ 3206 save_cmdline_row = cmdline_row; 3207 cmdline_row = 0; 3208 save_State = State; 3209 State = CMDLINE; 3210 3211 i = get_number(TRUE, mouse_used); 3212 if (KeyTyped) 3213 { 3214 /* don't call wait_return() now */ 3215 /* msg_putchar('\n'); */ 3216 cmdline_row = msg_row - 1; 3217 need_wait_return = FALSE; 3218 msg_didany = FALSE; 3219 } 3220 else 3221 cmdline_row = save_cmdline_row; 3222 State = save_State; 3223 3224 return i; 3225 } 3226 3227 void 3228 msgmore(n) 3229 long n; 3230 { 3231 long pn; 3232 3233 if (global_busy /* no messages now, wait until global is finished */ 3234 || !messaging()) /* 'lazyredraw' set, don't do messages now */ 3235 return; 3236 3237 /* We don't want to overwrite another important message, but do overwrite 3238 * a previous "more lines" or "fewer lines" message, so that "5dd" and 3239 * then "put" reports the last action. */ 3240 if (keep_msg != NULL && !keep_msg_more) 3241 return; 3242 3243 if (n > 0) 3244 pn = n; 3245 else 3246 pn = -n; 3247 3248 if (pn > p_report) 3249 { 3250 if (pn == 1) 3251 { 3252 if (n > 0) 3253 STRCPY(msg_buf, _("1 more line")); 3254 else 3255 STRCPY(msg_buf, _("1 line less")); 3256 } 3257 else 3258 { 3259 if (n > 0) 3260 sprintf((char *)msg_buf, _("%ld more lines"), pn); 3261 else 3262 sprintf((char *)msg_buf, _("%ld fewer lines"), pn); 3263 } 3264 if (got_int) 3265 STRCAT(msg_buf, _(" (Interrupted)")); 3266 if (msg(msg_buf)) 3267 { 3268 set_keep_msg(msg_buf, 0); 3269 keep_msg_more = TRUE; 3270 } 3271 } 3272 } 3273 3274 /* 3275 * flush map and typeahead buffers and give a warning for an error 3276 */ 3277 void 3278 beep_flush() 3279 { 3280 if (emsg_silent == 0) 3281 { 3282 flush_buffers(FALSE); 3283 vim_beep(); 3284 } 3285 } 3286 3287 /* 3288 * give a warning for an error 3289 */ 3290 void 3291 vim_beep() 3292 { 3293 if (emsg_silent == 0) 3294 { 3295 if (p_vb 3296 #ifdef FEAT_GUI 3297 /* While the GUI is starting up the termcap is set for the GUI 3298 * but the output still goes to a terminal. */ 3299 && !(gui.in_use && gui.starting) 3300 #endif 3301 ) 3302 { 3303 out_str(T_VB); 3304 } 3305 else 3306 { 3307 #ifdef MSDOS 3308 /* 3309 * The number of beeps outputted is reduced to avoid having to wait 3310 * for all the beeps to finish. This is only a problem on systems 3311 * where the beeps don't overlap. 3312 */ 3313 if (beep_count == 0 || beep_count == 10) 3314 { 3315 out_char(BELL); 3316 beep_count = 1; 3317 } 3318 else 3319 ++beep_count; 3320 #else 3321 out_char(BELL); 3322 #endif 3323 } 3324 3325 /* When 'verbose' is set and we are sourcing a script or executing a 3326 * function give the user a hint where the beep comes from. */ 3327 if (vim_strchr(p_debug, 'e') != NULL) 3328 { 3329 msg_source(hl_attr(HLF_W)); 3330 msg_attr((char_u *)_("Beep!"), hl_attr(HLF_W)); 3331 } 3332 } 3333 } 3334 3335 /* 3336 * To get the "real" home directory: 3337 * - get value of $HOME 3338 * For Unix: 3339 * - go to that directory 3340 * - do mch_dirname() to get the real name of that directory. 3341 * This also works with mounts and links. 3342 * Don't do this for MS-DOS, it will change the "current dir" for a drive. 3343 */ 3344 static char_u *homedir = NULL; 3345 3346 void 3347 init_homedir() 3348 { 3349 char_u *var; 3350 3351 /* In case we are called a second time (when 'encoding' changes). */ 3352 vim_free(homedir); 3353 homedir = NULL; 3354 3355 #ifdef VMS 3356 var = mch_getenv((char_u *)"SYS$LOGIN"); 3357 #else 3358 var = mch_getenv((char_u *)"HOME"); 3359 #endif 3360 3361 if (var != NULL && *var == NUL) /* empty is same as not set */ 3362 var = NULL; 3363 3364 #ifdef WIN3264 3365 /* 3366 * Weird but true: $HOME may contain an indirect reference to another 3367 * variable, esp. "%USERPROFILE%". Happens when $USERPROFILE isn't set 3368 * when $HOME is being set. 3369 */ 3370 if (var != NULL && *var == '%') 3371 { 3372 char_u *p; 3373 char_u *exp; 3374 3375 p = vim_strchr(var + 1, '%'); 3376 if (p != NULL) 3377 { 3378 vim_strncpy(NameBuff, var + 1, p - (var + 1)); 3379 exp = mch_getenv(NameBuff); 3380 if (exp != NULL && *exp != NUL 3381 && STRLEN(exp) + STRLEN(p) < MAXPATHL) 3382 { 3383 vim_snprintf((char *)NameBuff, MAXPATHL, "%s%s", exp, p + 1); 3384 var = NameBuff; 3385 /* Also set $HOME, it's needed for _viminfo. */ 3386 vim_setenv((char_u *)"HOME", NameBuff); 3387 } 3388 } 3389 } 3390 3391 /* 3392 * Typically, $HOME is not defined on Windows, unless the user has 3393 * specifically defined it for Vim's sake. However, on Windows NT 3394 * platforms, $HOMEDRIVE and $HOMEPATH are automatically defined for 3395 * each user. Try constructing $HOME from these. 3396 */ 3397 if (var == NULL) 3398 { 3399 char_u *homedrive, *homepath; 3400 3401 homedrive = mch_getenv((char_u *)"HOMEDRIVE"); 3402 homepath = mch_getenv((char_u *)"HOMEPATH"); 3403 if (homedrive != NULL && homepath != NULL 3404 && STRLEN(homedrive) + STRLEN(homepath) < MAXPATHL) 3405 { 3406 sprintf((char *)NameBuff, "%s%s", homedrive, homepath); 3407 if (NameBuff[0] != NUL) 3408 { 3409 var = NameBuff; 3410 /* Also set $HOME, it's needed for _viminfo. */ 3411 vim_setenv((char_u *)"HOME", NameBuff); 3412 } 3413 } 3414 } 3415 3416 # if defined(FEAT_MBYTE) 3417 if (enc_utf8 && var != NULL) 3418 { 3419 int len; 3420 char_u *pp; 3421 3422 /* Convert from active codepage to UTF-8. Other conversions are 3423 * not done, because they would fail for non-ASCII characters. */ 3424 acp_to_enc(var, (int)STRLEN(var), &pp, &len); 3425 if (pp != NULL) 3426 { 3427 homedir = pp; 3428 return; 3429 } 3430 } 3431 # endif 3432 #endif 3433 3434 #if defined(OS2) || defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN) 3435 /* 3436 * Default home dir is C:/ 3437 * Best assumption we can make in such a situation. 3438 */ 3439 if (var == NULL) 3440 var = "C:/"; 3441 #endif 3442 if (var != NULL) 3443 { 3444 #ifdef UNIX 3445 /* 3446 * Change to the directory and get the actual path. This resolves 3447 * links. Don't do it when we can't return. 3448 */ 3449 if (mch_dirname(NameBuff, MAXPATHL) == OK 3450 && mch_chdir((char *)NameBuff) == 0) 3451 { 3452 if (!mch_chdir((char *)var) && mch_dirname(IObuff, IOSIZE) == OK) 3453 var = IObuff; 3454 if (mch_chdir((char *)NameBuff) != 0) 3455 EMSG(_(e_prev_dir)); 3456 } 3457 #endif 3458 homedir = vim_strsave(var); 3459 } 3460 } 3461 3462 #if defined(EXITFREE) || defined(PROTO) 3463 void 3464 free_homedir() 3465 { 3466 vim_free(homedir); 3467 } 3468 #endif 3469 3470 /* 3471 * Expand environment variable with path name. 3472 * "~/" is also expanded, using $HOME. For Unix "~user/" is expanded. 3473 * Skips over "\ ", "\~" and "\$". 3474 * If anything fails no expansion is done and dst equals src. 3475 */ 3476 void 3477 expand_env(src, dst, dstlen) 3478 char_u *src; /* input string e.g. "$HOME/vim.hlp" */ 3479 char_u *dst; /* where to put the result */ 3480 int dstlen; /* maximum length of the result */ 3481 { 3482 expand_env_esc(src, dst, dstlen, FALSE, NULL); 3483 } 3484 3485 void 3486 expand_env_esc(srcp, dst, dstlen, esc, startstr) 3487 char_u *srcp; /* input string e.g. "$HOME/vim.hlp" */ 3488 char_u *dst; /* where to put the result */ 3489 int dstlen; /* maximum length of the result */ 3490 int esc; /* escape spaces in expanded variables */ 3491 char_u *startstr; /* start again after this (can be NULL) */ 3492 { 3493 char_u *src; 3494 char_u *tail; 3495 int c; 3496 char_u *var; 3497 int copy_char; 3498 int mustfree; /* var was allocated, need to free it later */ 3499 int at_start = TRUE; /* at start of a name */ 3500 int startstr_len = 0; 3501 3502 if (startstr != NULL) 3503 startstr_len = (int)STRLEN(startstr); 3504 3505 src = skipwhite(srcp); 3506 --dstlen; /* leave one char space for "\," */ 3507 while (*src && dstlen > 0) 3508 { 3509 copy_char = TRUE; 3510 if ((*src == '$' 3511 #ifdef VMS 3512 && at_start 3513 #endif 3514 ) 3515 #if defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN) || defined(OS2) 3516 || *src == '%' 3517 #endif 3518 || (*src == '~' && at_start)) 3519 { 3520 mustfree = FALSE; 3521 3522 /* 3523 * The variable name is copied into dst temporarily, because it may 3524 * be a string in read-only memory and a NUL needs to be appended. 3525 */ 3526 if (*src != '~') /* environment var */ 3527 { 3528 tail = src + 1; 3529 var = dst; 3530 c = dstlen - 1; 3531 3532 #ifdef UNIX 3533 /* Unix has ${var-name} type environment vars */ 3534 if (*tail == '{' && !vim_isIDc('{')) 3535 { 3536 tail++; /* ignore '{' */ 3537 while (c-- > 0 && *tail && *tail != '}') 3538 *var++ = *tail++; 3539 } 3540 else 3541 #endif 3542 { 3543 while (c-- > 0 && *tail != NUL && ((vim_isIDc(*tail)) 3544 #if defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN) || defined(OS2) 3545 || (*src == '%' && *tail != '%') 3546 #endif 3547 )) 3548 { 3549 #ifdef OS2 /* env vars only in uppercase */ 3550 *var++ = TOUPPER_LOC(*tail); 3551 tail++; /* toupper() may be a macro! */ 3552 #else 3553 *var++ = *tail++; 3554 #endif 3555 } 3556 } 3557 3558 #if defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN) || defined(OS2) || defined(UNIX) 3559 # ifdef UNIX 3560 if (src[1] == '{' && *tail != '}') 3561 # else 3562 if (*src == '%' && *tail != '%') 3563 # endif 3564 var = NULL; 3565 else 3566 { 3567 # ifdef UNIX 3568 if (src[1] == '{') 3569 # else 3570 if (*src == '%') 3571 #endif 3572 ++tail; 3573 #endif 3574 *var = NUL; 3575 var = vim_getenv(dst, &mustfree); 3576 #if defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN) || defined(OS2) || defined(UNIX) 3577 } 3578 #endif 3579 } 3580 /* home directory */ 3581 else if ( src[1] == NUL 3582 || vim_ispathsep(src[1]) 3583 || vim_strchr((char_u *)" ,\t\n", src[1]) != NULL) 3584 { 3585 var = homedir; 3586 tail = src + 1; 3587 } 3588 else /* user directory */ 3589 { 3590 #if defined(UNIX) || (defined(VMS) && defined(USER_HOME)) 3591 /* 3592 * Copy ~user to dst[], so we can put a NUL after it. 3593 */ 3594 tail = src; 3595 var = dst; 3596 c = dstlen - 1; 3597 while ( c-- > 0 3598 && *tail 3599 && vim_isfilec(*tail) 3600 && !vim_ispathsep(*tail)) 3601 *var++ = *tail++; 3602 *var = NUL; 3603 # ifdef UNIX 3604 /* 3605 * If the system supports getpwnam(), use it. 3606 * Otherwise, or if getpwnam() fails, the shell is used to 3607 * expand ~user. This is slower and may fail if the shell 3608 * does not support ~user (old versions of /bin/sh). 3609 */ 3610 # if defined(HAVE_GETPWNAM) && defined(HAVE_PWD_H) 3611 { 3612 struct passwd *pw; 3613 3614 /* Note: memory allocated by getpwnam() is never freed. 3615 * Calling endpwent() apparently doesn't help. */ 3616 pw = getpwnam((char *)dst + 1); 3617 if (pw != NULL) 3618 var = (char_u *)pw->pw_dir; 3619 else 3620 var = NULL; 3621 } 3622 if (var == NULL) 3623 # endif 3624 { 3625 expand_T xpc; 3626 3627 ExpandInit(&xpc); 3628 xpc.xp_context = EXPAND_FILES; 3629 var = ExpandOne(&xpc, dst, NULL, 3630 WILD_ADD_SLASH|WILD_SILENT, WILD_EXPAND_FREE); 3631 mustfree = TRUE; 3632 } 3633 3634 # else /* !UNIX, thus VMS */ 3635 /* 3636 * USER_HOME is a comma-separated list of 3637 * directories to search for the user account in. 3638 */ 3639 { 3640 char_u test[MAXPATHL], paths[MAXPATHL]; 3641 char_u *path, *next_path, *ptr; 3642 struct stat st; 3643 3644 STRCPY(paths, USER_HOME); 3645 next_path = paths; 3646 while (*next_path) 3647 { 3648 for (path = next_path; *next_path && *next_path != ','; 3649 next_path++); 3650 if (*next_path) 3651 *next_path++ = NUL; 3652 STRCPY(test, path); 3653 STRCAT(test, "/"); 3654 STRCAT(test, dst + 1); 3655 if (mch_stat(test, &st) == 0) 3656 { 3657 var = alloc(STRLEN(test) + 1); 3658 STRCPY(var, test); 3659 mustfree = TRUE; 3660 break; 3661 } 3662 } 3663 } 3664 # endif /* UNIX */ 3665 #else 3666 /* cannot expand user's home directory, so don't try */ 3667 var = NULL; 3668 tail = (char_u *)""; /* for gcc */ 3669 #endif /* UNIX || VMS */ 3670 } 3671 3672 #ifdef BACKSLASH_IN_FILENAME 3673 /* If 'shellslash' is set change backslashes to forward slashes. 3674 * Can't use slash_adjust(), p_ssl may be set temporarily. */ 3675 if (p_ssl && var != NULL && vim_strchr(var, '\\') != NULL) 3676 { 3677 char_u *p = vim_strsave(var); 3678 3679 if (p != NULL) 3680 { 3681 if (mustfree) 3682 vim_free(var); 3683 var = p; 3684 mustfree = TRUE; 3685 forward_slash(var); 3686 } 3687 } 3688 #endif 3689 3690 /* If "var" contains white space, escape it with a backslash. 3691 * Required for ":e ~/tt" when $HOME includes a space. */ 3692 if (esc && var != NULL && vim_strpbrk(var, (char_u *)" \t") != NULL) 3693 { 3694 char_u *p = vim_strsave_escaped(var, (char_u *)" \t"); 3695 3696 if (p != NULL) 3697 { 3698 if (mustfree) 3699 vim_free(var); 3700 var = p; 3701 mustfree = TRUE; 3702 } 3703 } 3704 3705 if (var != NULL && *var != NUL 3706 && (STRLEN(var) + STRLEN(tail) + 1 < (unsigned)dstlen)) 3707 { 3708 STRCPY(dst, var); 3709 dstlen -= (int)STRLEN(var); 3710 c = (int)STRLEN(var); 3711 /* if var[] ends in a path separator and tail[] starts 3712 * with it, skip a character */ 3713 if (*var != NUL && after_pathsep(dst, dst + c) 3714 #if defined(BACKSLASH_IN_FILENAME) || defined(AMIGA) 3715 && dst[-1] != ':' 3716 #endif 3717 && vim_ispathsep(*tail)) 3718 ++tail; 3719 dst += c; 3720 src = tail; 3721 copy_char = FALSE; 3722 } 3723 if (mustfree) 3724 vim_free(var); 3725 } 3726 3727 if (copy_char) /* copy at least one char */ 3728 { 3729 /* 3730 * Recogize the start of a new name, for '~'. 3731 */ 3732 at_start = FALSE; 3733 if (src[0] == '\\' && src[1] != NUL) 3734 { 3735 *dst++ = *src++; 3736 --dstlen; 3737 } 3738 else if (src[0] == ' ' || src[0] == ',') 3739 at_start = TRUE; 3740 *dst++ = *src++; 3741 --dstlen; 3742 3743 if (startstr != NULL && src - startstr_len >= srcp 3744 && STRNCMP(src - startstr_len, startstr, startstr_len) == 0) 3745 at_start = TRUE; 3746 } 3747 } 3748 *dst = NUL; 3749 } 3750 3751 /* 3752 * Vim's version of getenv(). 3753 * Special handling of $HOME, $VIM and $VIMRUNTIME. 3754 * Also does ACP to 'enc' conversion for Win32. 3755 */ 3756 char_u * 3757 vim_getenv(name, mustfree) 3758 char_u *name; 3759 int *mustfree; /* set to TRUE when returned is allocated */ 3760 { 3761 char_u *p; 3762 char_u *pend; 3763 int vimruntime; 3764 3765 #if defined(OS2) || defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN) 3766 /* use "C:/" when $HOME is not set */ 3767 if (STRCMP(name, "HOME") == 0) 3768 return homedir; 3769 #endif 3770 3771 p = mch_getenv(name); 3772 if (p != NULL && *p == NUL) /* empty is the same as not set */ 3773 p = NULL; 3774 3775 if (p != NULL) 3776 { 3777 #if defined(FEAT_MBYTE) && defined(WIN3264) 3778 if (enc_utf8) 3779 { 3780 int len; 3781 char_u *pp; 3782 3783 /* Convert from active codepage to UTF-8. Other conversions are 3784 * not done, because they would fail for non-ASCII characters. */ 3785 acp_to_enc(p, (int)STRLEN(p), &pp, &len); 3786 if (pp != NULL) 3787 { 3788 p = pp; 3789 *mustfree = TRUE; 3790 } 3791 } 3792 #endif 3793 return p; 3794 } 3795 3796 vimruntime = (STRCMP(name, "VIMRUNTIME") == 0); 3797 if (!vimruntime && STRCMP(name, "VIM") != 0) 3798 return NULL; 3799 3800 /* 3801 * When expanding $VIMRUNTIME fails, try using $VIM/vim<version> or $VIM. 3802 * Don't do this when default_vimruntime_dir is non-empty. 3803 */ 3804 if (vimruntime 3805 #ifdef HAVE_PATHDEF 3806 && *default_vimruntime_dir == NUL 3807 #endif 3808 ) 3809 { 3810 p = mch_getenv((char_u *)"VIM"); 3811 if (p != NULL && *p == NUL) /* empty is the same as not set */ 3812 p = NULL; 3813 if (p != NULL) 3814 { 3815 p = vim_version_dir(p); 3816 if (p != NULL) 3817 *mustfree = TRUE; 3818 else 3819 p = mch_getenv((char_u *)"VIM"); 3820 3821 #if defined(FEAT_MBYTE) && defined(WIN3264) 3822 if (enc_utf8) 3823 { 3824 int len; 3825 char_u *pp; 3826 3827 /* Convert from active codepage to UTF-8. Other conversions 3828 * are not done, because they would fail for non-ASCII 3829 * characters. */ 3830 acp_to_enc(p, (int)STRLEN(p), &pp, &len); 3831 if (pp != NULL) 3832 { 3833 if (mustfree) 3834 vim_free(p); 3835 p = pp; 3836 *mustfree = TRUE; 3837 } 3838 } 3839 #endif 3840 } 3841 } 3842 3843 /* 3844 * When expanding $VIM or $VIMRUNTIME fails, try using: 3845 * - the directory name from 'helpfile' (unless it contains '$') 3846 * - the executable name from argv[0] 3847 */ 3848 if (p == NULL) 3849 { 3850 if (p_hf != NULL && vim_strchr(p_hf, '$') == NULL) 3851 p = p_hf; 3852 #ifdef USE_EXE_NAME 3853 /* 3854 * Use the name of the executable, obtained from argv[0]. 3855 */ 3856 else 3857 p = exe_name; 3858 #endif 3859 if (p != NULL) 3860 { 3861 /* remove the file name */ 3862 pend = gettail(p); 3863 3864 /* remove "doc/" from 'helpfile', if present */ 3865 if (p == p_hf) 3866 pend = remove_tail(p, pend, (char_u *)"doc"); 3867 3868 #ifdef USE_EXE_NAME 3869 # ifdef MACOS_X 3870 /* remove "MacOS" from exe_name and add "Resources/vim" */ 3871 if (p == exe_name) 3872 { 3873 char_u *pend1; 3874 char_u *pnew; 3875 3876 pend1 = remove_tail(p, pend, (char_u *)"MacOS"); 3877 if (pend1 != pend) 3878 { 3879 pnew = alloc((unsigned)(pend1 - p) + 15); 3880 if (pnew != NULL) 3881 { 3882 STRNCPY(pnew, p, (pend1 - p)); 3883 STRCPY(pnew + (pend1 - p), "Resources/vim"); 3884 p = pnew; 3885 pend = p + STRLEN(p); 3886 } 3887 } 3888 } 3889 # endif 3890 /* remove "src/" from exe_name, if present */ 3891 if (p == exe_name) 3892 pend = remove_tail(p, pend, (char_u *)"src"); 3893 #endif 3894 3895 /* for $VIM, remove "runtime/" or "vim54/", if present */ 3896 if (!vimruntime) 3897 { 3898 pend = remove_tail(p, pend, (char_u *)RUNTIME_DIRNAME); 3899 pend = remove_tail(p, pend, (char_u *)VIM_VERSION_NODOT); 3900 } 3901 3902 /* remove trailing path separator */ 3903 #ifndef MACOS_CLASSIC 3904 /* With MacOS path (with colons) the final colon is required */ 3905 /* to avoid confusion between absoulute and relative path */ 3906 if (pend > p && after_pathsep(p, pend)) 3907 --pend; 3908 #endif 3909 3910 #ifdef MACOS_X 3911 if (p == exe_name || p == p_hf) 3912 #endif 3913 /* check that the result is a directory name */ 3914 p = vim_strnsave(p, (int)(pend - p)); 3915 3916 if (p != NULL && !mch_isdir(p)) 3917 { 3918 vim_free(p); 3919 p = NULL; 3920 } 3921 else 3922 { 3923 #ifdef USE_EXE_NAME 3924 /* may add "/vim54" or "/runtime" if it exists */ 3925 if (vimruntime && (pend = vim_version_dir(p)) != NULL) 3926 { 3927 vim_free(p); 3928 p = pend; 3929 } 3930 #endif 3931 *mustfree = TRUE; 3932 } 3933 } 3934 } 3935 3936 #ifdef HAVE_PATHDEF 3937 /* When there is a pathdef.c file we can use default_vim_dir and 3938 * default_vimruntime_dir */ 3939 if (p == NULL) 3940 { 3941 /* Only use default_vimruntime_dir when it is not empty */ 3942 if (vimruntime && *default_vimruntime_dir != NUL) 3943 { 3944 p = default_vimruntime_dir; 3945 *mustfree = FALSE; 3946 } 3947 else if (*default_vim_dir != NUL) 3948 { 3949 if (vimruntime && (p = vim_version_dir(default_vim_dir)) != NULL) 3950 *mustfree = TRUE; 3951 else 3952 { 3953 p = default_vim_dir; 3954 *mustfree = FALSE; 3955 } 3956 } 3957 } 3958 #endif 3959 3960 /* 3961 * Set the environment variable, so that the new value can be found fast 3962 * next time, and others can also use it (e.g. Perl). 3963 */ 3964 if (p != NULL) 3965 { 3966 if (vimruntime) 3967 { 3968 vim_setenv((char_u *)"VIMRUNTIME", p); 3969 didset_vimruntime = TRUE; 3970 #ifdef FEAT_GETTEXT 3971 { 3972 char_u *buf = concat_str(p, (char_u *)"/lang"); 3973 3974 if (buf != NULL) 3975 { 3976 bindtextdomain(VIMPACKAGE, (char *)buf); 3977 vim_free(buf); 3978 } 3979 } 3980 #endif 3981 } 3982 else 3983 { 3984 vim_setenv((char_u *)"VIM", p); 3985 didset_vim = TRUE; 3986 } 3987 } 3988 return p; 3989 } 3990 3991 /* 3992 * Check if the directory "vimdir/<version>" or "vimdir/runtime" exists. 3993 * Return NULL if not, return its name in allocated memory otherwise. 3994 */ 3995 static char_u * 3996 vim_version_dir(vimdir) 3997 char_u *vimdir; 3998 { 3999 char_u *p; 4000 4001 if (vimdir == NULL || *vimdir == NUL) 4002 return NULL; 4003 p = concat_fnames(vimdir, (char_u *)VIM_VERSION_NODOT, TRUE); 4004 if (p != NULL && mch_isdir(p)) 4005 return p; 4006 vim_free(p); 4007 p = concat_fnames(vimdir, (char_u *)RUNTIME_DIRNAME, TRUE); 4008 if (p != NULL && mch_isdir(p)) 4009 return p; 4010 vim_free(p); 4011 return NULL; 4012 } 4013 4014 /* 4015 * If the string between "p" and "pend" ends in "name/", return "pend" minus 4016 * the length of "name/". Otherwise return "pend". 4017 */ 4018 static char_u * 4019 remove_tail(p, pend, name) 4020 char_u *p; 4021 char_u *pend; 4022 char_u *name; 4023 { 4024 int len = (int)STRLEN(name) + 1; 4025 char_u *newend = pend - len; 4026 4027 if (newend >= p 4028 && fnamencmp(newend, name, len - 1) == 0 4029 && (newend == p || after_pathsep(p, newend))) 4030 return newend; 4031 return pend; 4032 } 4033 4034 /* 4035 * Call expand_env() and store the result in an allocated string. 4036 * This is not very memory efficient, this expects the result to be freed 4037 * again soon. 4038 */ 4039 char_u * 4040 expand_env_save(src) 4041 char_u *src; 4042 { 4043 char_u *p; 4044 4045 p = alloc(MAXPATHL); 4046 if (p != NULL) 4047 expand_env(src, p, MAXPATHL); 4048 return p; 4049 } 4050 4051 /* 4052 * Our portable version of setenv. 4053 */ 4054 void 4055 vim_setenv(name, val) 4056 char_u *name; 4057 char_u *val; 4058 { 4059 #ifdef HAVE_SETENV 4060 mch_setenv((char *)name, (char *)val, 1); 4061 #else 4062 char_u *envbuf; 4063 4064 /* 4065 * Putenv does not copy the string, it has to remain 4066 * valid. The allocated memory will never be freed. 4067 */ 4068 envbuf = alloc((unsigned)(STRLEN(name) + STRLEN(val) + 2)); 4069 if (envbuf != NULL) 4070 { 4071 sprintf((char *)envbuf, "%s=%s", name, val); 4072 putenv((char *)envbuf); 4073 } 4074 #endif 4075 } 4076 4077 #if defined(FEAT_CMDL_COMPL) || defined(PROTO) 4078 /* 4079 * Function given to ExpandGeneric() to obtain an environment variable name. 4080 */ 4081 /*ARGSUSED*/ 4082 char_u * 4083 get_env_name(xp, idx) 4084 expand_T *xp; 4085 int idx; 4086 { 4087 # if defined(AMIGA) || defined(__MRC__) || defined(__SC__) 4088 /* 4089 * No environ[] on the Amiga and on the Mac (using MPW). 4090 */ 4091 return NULL; 4092 # else 4093 # ifndef __WIN32__ 4094 /* Borland C++ 5.2 has this in a header file. */ 4095 extern char **environ; 4096 # endif 4097 # define ENVNAMELEN 100 4098 static char_u name[ENVNAMELEN]; 4099 char_u *str; 4100 int n; 4101 4102 str = (char_u *)environ[idx]; 4103 if (str == NULL) 4104 return NULL; 4105 4106 for (n = 0; n < ENVNAMELEN - 1; ++n) 4107 { 4108 if (str[n] == '=' || str[n] == NUL) 4109 break; 4110 name[n] = str[n]; 4111 } 4112 name[n] = NUL; 4113 return name; 4114 # endif 4115 } 4116 #endif 4117 4118 /* 4119 * Replace home directory by "~" in each space or comma separated file name in 4120 * 'src'. 4121 * If anything fails (except when out of space) dst equals src. 4122 */ 4123 void 4124 home_replace(buf, src, dst, dstlen, one) 4125 buf_T *buf; /* when not NULL, check for help files */ 4126 char_u *src; /* input file name */ 4127 char_u *dst; /* where to put the result */ 4128 int dstlen; /* maximum length of the result */ 4129 int one; /* if TRUE, only replace one file name, include 4130 spaces and commas in the file name. */ 4131 { 4132 size_t dirlen = 0, envlen = 0; 4133 size_t len; 4134 char_u *homedir_env; 4135 char_u *p; 4136 4137 if (src == NULL) 4138 { 4139 *dst = NUL; 4140 return; 4141 } 4142 4143 /* 4144 * If the file is a help file, remove the path completely. 4145 */ 4146 if (buf != NULL && buf->b_help) 4147 { 4148 STRCPY(dst, gettail(src)); 4149 return; 4150 } 4151 4152 /* 4153 * We check both the value of the $HOME environment variable and the 4154 * "real" home directory. 4155 */ 4156 if (homedir != NULL) 4157 dirlen = STRLEN(homedir); 4158 4159 #ifdef VMS 4160 homedir_env = mch_getenv((char_u *)"SYS$LOGIN"); 4161 #else 4162 homedir_env = mch_getenv((char_u *)"HOME"); 4163 #endif 4164 4165 if (homedir_env != NULL && *homedir_env == NUL) 4166 homedir_env = NULL; 4167 if (homedir_env != NULL) 4168 envlen = STRLEN(homedir_env); 4169 4170 if (!one) 4171 src = skipwhite(src); 4172 while (*src && dstlen > 0) 4173 { 4174 /* 4175 * Here we are at the beginning of a file name. 4176 * First, check to see if the beginning of the file name matches 4177 * $HOME or the "real" home directory. Check that there is a '/' 4178 * after the match (so that if e.g. the file is "/home/pieter/bla", 4179 * and the home directory is "/home/piet", the file does not end up 4180 * as "~er/bla" (which would seem to indicate the file "bla" in user 4181 * er's home directory)). 4182 */ 4183 p = homedir; 4184 len = dirlen; 4185 for (;;) 4186 { 4187 if ( len 4188 && fnamencmp(src, p, len) == 0 4189 && (vim_ispathsep(src[len]) 4190 || (!one && (src[len] == ',' || src[len] == ' ')) 4191 || src[len] == NUL)) 4192 { 4193 src += len; 4194 if (--dstlen > 0) 4195 *dst++ = '~'; 4196 4197 /* 4198 * If it's just the home directory, add "/". 4199 */ 4200 if (!vim_ispathsep(src[0]) && --dstlen > 0) 4201 *dst++ = '/'; 4202 break; 4203 } 4204 if (p == homedir_env) 4205 break; 4206 p = homedir_env; 4207 len = envlen; 4208 } 4209 4210 /* if (!one) skip to separator: space or comma */ 4211 while (*src && (one || (*src != ',' && *src != ' ')) && --dstlen > 0) 4212 *dst++ = *src++; 4213 /* skip separator */ 4214 while ((*src == ' ' || *src == ',') && --dstlen > 0) 4215 *dst++ = *src++; 4216 } 4217 /* if (dstlen == 0) out of space, what to do??? */ 4218 4219 *dst = NUL; 4220 } 4221 4222 /* 4223 * Like home_replace, store the replaced string in allocated memory. 4224 * When something fails, NULL is returned. 4225 */ 4226 char_u * 4227 home_replace_save(buf, src) 4228 buf_T *buf; /* when not NULL, check for help files */ 4229 char_u *src; /* input file name */ 4230 { 4231 char_u *dst; 4232 unsigned len; 4233 4234 len = 3; /* space for "~/" and trailing NUL */ 4235 if (src != NULL) /* just in case */ 4236 len += (unsigned)STRLEN(src); 4237 dst = alloc(len); 4238 if (dst != NULL) 4239 home_replace(buf, src, dst, len, TRUE); 4240 return dst; 4241 } 4242 4243 /* 4244 * Compare two file names and return: 4245 * FPC_SAME if they both exist and are the same file. 4246 * FPC_SAMEX if they both don't exist and have the same file name. 4247 * FPC_DIFF if they both exist and are different files. 4248 * FPC_NOTX if they both don't exist. 4249 * FPC_DIFFX if one of them doesn't exist. 4250 * For the first name environment variables are expanded 4251 */ 4252 int 4253 fullpathcmp(s1, s2, checkname) 4254 char_u *s1, *s2; 4255 int checkname; /* when both don't exist, check file names */ 4256 { 4257 #ifdef UNIX 4258 char_u exp1[MAXPATHL]; 4259 char_u full1[MAXPATHL]; 4260 char_u full2[MAXPATHL]; 4261 struct stat st1, st2; 4262 int r1, r2; 4263 4264 expand_env(s1, exp1, MAXPATHL); 4265 r1 = mch_stat((char *)exp1, &st1); 4266 r2 = mch_stat((char *)s2, &st2); 4267 if (r1 != 0 && r2 != 0) 4268 { 4269 /* if mch_stat() doesn't work, may compare the names */ 4270 if (checkname) 4271 { 4272 if (fnamecmp(exp1, s2) == 0) 4273 return FPC_SAMEX; 4274 r1 = vim_FullName(exp1, full1, MAXPATHL, FALSE); 4275 r2 = vim_FullName(s2, full2, MAXPATHL, FALSE); 4276 if (r1 == OK && r2 == OK && fnamecmp(full1, full2) == 0) 4277 return FPC_SAMEX; 4278 } 4279 return FPC_NOTX; 4280 } 4281 if (r1 != 0 || r2 != 0) 4282 return FPC_DIFFX; 4283 if (st1.st_dev == st2.st_dev && st1.st_ino == st2.st_ino) 4284 return FPC_SAME; 4285 return FPC_DIFF; 4286 #else 4287 char_u *exp1; /* expanded s1 */ 4288 char_u *full1; /* full path of s1 */ 4289 char_u *full2; /* full path of s2 */ 4290 int retval = FPC_DIFF; 4291 int r1, r2; 4292 4293 /* allocate one buffer to store three paths (alloc()/free() is slow!) */ 4294 if ((exp1 = alloc(MAXPATHL * 3)) != NULL) 4295 { 4296 full1 = exp1 + MAXPATHL; 4297 full2 = full1 + MAXPATHL; 4298 4299 expand_env(s1, exp1, MAXPATHL); 4300 r1 = vim_FullName(exp1, full1, MAXPATHL, FALSE); 4301 r2 = vim_FullName(s2, full2, MAXPATHL, FALSE); 4302 4303 /* If vim_FullName() fails, the file probably doesn't exist. */ 4304 if (r1 != OK && r2 != OK) 4305 { 4306 if (checkname && fnamecmp(exp1, s2) == 0) 4307 retval = FPC_SAMEX; 4308 else 4309 retval = FPC_NOTX; 4310 } 4311 else if (r1 != OK || r2 != OK) 4312 retval = FPC_DIFFX; 4313 else if (fnamecmp(full1, full2)) 4314 retval = FPC_DIFF; 4315 else 4316 retval = FPC_SAME; 4317 vim_free(exp1); 4318 } 4319 return retval; 4320 #endif 4321 } 4322 4323 /* 4324 * Get the tail of a path: the file name. 4325 * Fail safe: never returns NULL. 4326 */ 4327 char_u * 4328 gettail(fname) 4329 char_u *fname; 4330 { 4331 char_u *p1, *p2; 4332 4333 if (fname == NULL) 4334 return (char_u *)""; 4335 for (p1 = p2 = fname; *p2; ) /* find last part of path */ 4336 { 4337 if (vim_ispathsep(*p2)) 4338 p1 = p2 + 1; 4339 mb_ptr_adv(p2); 4340 } 4341 return p1; 4342 } 4343 4344 /* 4345 * Get pointer to tail of "fname", including path separators. Putting a NUL 4346 * here leaves the directory name. Takes care of "c:/" and "//". 4347 * Always returns a valid pointer. 4348 */ 4349 char_u * 4350 gettail_sep(fname) 4351 char_u *fname; 4352 { 4353 char_u *p; 4354 char_u *t; 4355 4356 p = get_past_head(fname); /* don't remove the '/' from "c:/file" */ 4357 t = gettail(fname); 4358 while (t > p && after_pathsep(fname, t)) 4359 --t; 4360 #ifdef VMS 4361 /* path separator is part of the path */ 4362 ++t; 4363 #endif 4364 return t; 4365 } 4366 4367 /* 4368 * get the next path component (just after the next path separator). 4369 */ 4370 char_u * 4371 getnextcomp(fname) 4372 char_u *fname; 4373 { 4374 while (*fname && !vim_ispathsep(*fname)) 4375 mb_ptr_adv(fname); 4376 if (*fname) 4377 ++fname; 4378 return fname; 4379 } 4380 4381 /* 4382 * Get a pointer to one character past the head of a path name. 4383 * Unix: after "/"; DOS: after "c:\"; Amiga: after "disk:/"; Mac: no head. 4384 * If there is no head, path is returned. 4385 */ 4386 char_u * 4387 get_past_head(path) 4388 char_u *path; 4389 { 4390 char_u *retval; 4391 4392 #if defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN) || defined(OS2) 4393 /* may skip "c:" */ 4394 if (isalpha(path[0]) && path[1] == ':') 4395 retval = path + 2; 4396 else 4397 retval = path; 4398 #else 4399 # if defined(AMIGA) 4400 /* may skip "label:" */ 4401 retval = vim_strchr(path, ':'); 4402 if (retval == NULL) 4403 retval = path; 4404 # else /* Unix */ 4405 retval = path; 4406 # endif 4407 #endif 4408 4409 while (vim_ispathsep(*retval)) 4410 ++retval; 4411 4412 return retval; 4413 } 4414 4415 /* 4416 * return TRUE if 'c' is a path separator. 4417 */ 4418 int 4419 vim_ispathsep(c) 4420 int c; 4421 { 4422 #ifdef RISCOS 4423 return (c == '.' || c == ':'); 4424 #else 4425 # ifdef UNIX 4426 return (c == '/'); /* UNIX has ':' inside file names */ 4427 # else 4428 # ifdef BACKSLASH_IN_FILENAME 4429 return (c == ':' || c == '/' || c == '\\'); 4430 # else 4431 # ifdef VMS 4432 /* server"user passwd"::device:[full.path.name]fname.extension;version" */ 4433 return (c == ':' || c == '[' || c == ']' || c == '/' 4434 || c == '<' || c == '>' || c == '"' ); 4435 # else /* Amiga */ 4436 return (c == ':' || c == '/'); 4437 # endif /* VMS */ 4438 # endif 4439 # endif 4440 #endif /* RISC OS */ 4441 } 4442 4443 #if defined(FEAT_SEARCHPATH) || defined(PROTO) 4444 /* 4445 * return TRUE if 'c' is a path list separator. 4446 */ 4447 int 4448 vim_ispathlistsep(c) 4449 int c; 4450 { 4451 #ifdef UNIX 4452 return (c == ':'); 4453 #else 4454 return (c == ';'); /* might not be rigth for every system... */ 4455 #endif 4456 } 4457 #endif 4458 4459 #if defined(FEAT_GUI_TABLINE) || defined(FEAT_WINDOWS) \ 4460 || defined(FEAT_EVAL) || defined(PROTO) 4461 /* 4462 * Shorten the path of a file from "~/foo/../.bar/fname" to "~/f/../.b/fname" 4463 * It's done in-place. 4464 */ 4465 void 4466 shorten_dir(str) 4467 char_u *str; 4468 { 4469 char_u *tail, *s, *d; 4470 int skip = FALSE; 4471 4472 tail = gettail(str); 4473 d = str; 4474 for (s = str; ; ++s) 4475 { 4476 if (s >= tail) /* copy the whole tail */ 4477 { 4478 *d++ = *s; 4479 if (*s == NUL) 4480 break; 4481 } 4482 else if (vim_ispathsep(*s)) /* copy '/' and next char */ 4483 { 4484 *d++ = *s; 4485 skip = FALSE; 4486 } 4487 else if (!skip) 4488 { 4489 *d++ = *s; /* copy next char */ 4490 if (*s != '~' && *s != '.') /* and leading "~" and "." */ 4491 skip = TRUE; 4492 # ifdef FEAT_MBYTE 4493 if (has_mbyte) 4494 { 4495 int l = mb_ptr2len(s); 4496 4497 while (--l > 0) 4498 *d++ = *++s; 4499 } 4500 # endif 4501 } 4502 } 4503 } 4504 #endif 4505 4506 /* 4507 * Return TRUE if the directory of "fname" exists, FALSE otherwise. 4508 * Also returns TRUE if there is no directory name. 4509 * "fname" must be writable!. 4510 */ 4511 int 4512 dir_of_file_exists(fname) 4513 char_u *fname; 4514 { 4515 char_u *p; 4516 int c; 4517 int retval; 4518 4519 p = gettail_sep(fname); 4520 if (p == fname) 4521 return TRUE; 4522 c = *p; 4523 *p = NUL; 4524 retval = mch_isdir(fname); 4525 *p = c; 4526 return retval; 4527 } 4528 4529 #if (defined(CASE_INSENSITIVE_FILENAME) && defined(BACKSLASH_IN_FILENAME)) \ 4530 || defined(PROTO) 4531 /* 4532 * Versions of fnamecmp() and fnamencmp() that handle '/' and '\' equally. 4533 */ 4534 int 4535 vim_fnamecmp(x, y) 4536 char_u *x, *y; 4537 { 4538 return vim_fnamencmp(x, y, MAXPATHL); 4539 } 4540 4541 int 4542 vim_fnamencmp(x, y, len) 4543 char_u *x, *y; 4544 size_t len; 4545 { 4546 while (len > 0 && *x && *y) 4547 { 4548 if (TOLOWER_LOC(*x) != TOLOWER_LOC(*y) 4549 && !(*x == '/' && *y == '\\') 4550 && !(*x == '\\' && *y == '/')) 4551 break; 4552 ++x; 4553 ++y; 4554 --len; 4555 } 4556 if (len == 0) 4557 return 0; 4558 return (*x - *y); 4559 } 4560 #endif 4561 4562 /* 4563 * Concatenate file names fname1 and fname2 into allocated memory. 4564 * Only add a '/' or '\\' when 'sep' is TRUE and it is neccesary. 4565 */ 4566 char_u * 4567 concat_fnames(fname1, fname2, sep) 4568 char_u *fname1; 4569 char_u *fname2; 4570 int sep; 4571 { 4572 char_u *dest; 4573 4574 dest = alloc((unsigned)(STRLEN(fname1) + STRLEN(fname2) + 3)); 4575 if (dest != NULL) 4576 { 4577 STRCPY(dest, fname1); 4578 if (sep) 4579 add_pathsep(dest); 4580 STRCAT(dest, fname2); 4581 } 4582 return dest; 4583 } 4584 4585 #if defined(FEAT_EVAL) || defined(FEAT_GETTEXT) || defined(PROTO) 4586 /* 4587 * Concatenate two strings and return the result in allocated memory. 4588 * Returns NULL when out of memory. 4589 */ 4590 char_u * 4591 concat_str(str1, str2) 4592 char_u *str1; 4593 char_u *str2; 4594 { 4595 char_u *dest; 4596 size_t l = STRLEN(str1); 4597 4598 dest = alloc((unsigned)(l + STRLEN(str2) + 1L)); 4599 if (dest != NULL) 4600 { 4601 STRCPY(dest, str1); 4602 STRCPY(dest + l, str2); 4603 } 4604 return dest; 4605 } 4606 #endif 4607 4608 /* 4609 * Add a path separator to a file name, unless it already ends in a path 4610 * separator. 4611 */ 4612 void 4613 add_pathsep(p) 4614 char_u *p; 4615 { 4616 if (*p != NUL && !after_pathsep(p, p + STRLEN(p))) 4617 STRCAT(p, PATHSEPSTR); 4618 } 4619 4620 /* 4621 * FullName_save - Make an allocated copy of a full file name. 4622 * Returns NULL when out of memory. 4623 */ 4624 char_u * 4625 FullName_save(fname, force) 4626 char_u *fname; 4627 int force; /* force expansion, even when it already looks 4628 like a full path name */ 4629 { 4630 char_u *buf; 4631 char_u *new_fname = NULL; 4632 4633 if (fname == NULL) 4634 return NULL; 4635 4636 buf = alloc((unsigned)MAXPATHL); 4637 if (buf != NULL) 4638 { 4639 if (vim_FullName(fname, buf, MAXPATHL, force) != FAIL) 4640 new_fname = vim_strsave(buf); 4641 else 4642 new_fname = vim_strsave(fname); 4643 vim_free(buf); 4644 } 4645 return new_fname; 4646 } 4647 4648 #if defined(FEAT_CINDENT) || defined(FEAT_SYN_HL) 4649 4650 static char_u *skip_string __ARGS((char_u *p)); 4651 4652 /* 4653 * Find the start of a comment, not knowing if we are in a comment right now. 4654 * Search starts at w_cursor.lnum and goes backwards. 4655 */ 4656 pos_T * 4657 find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment) /* XXX */ 4658 int ind_maxcomment; 4659 { 4660 pos_T *pos; 4661 char_u *line; 4662 char_u *p; 4663 int cur_maxcomment = ind_maxcomment; 4664 4665 for (;;) 4666 { 4667 pos = findmatchlimit(NULL, '*', FM_BACKWARD, cur_maxcomment); 4668 if (pos == NULL) 4669 break; 4670 4671 /* 4672 * Check if the comment start we found is inside a string. 4673 * If it is then restrict the search to below this line and try again. 4674 */ 4675 line = ml_get(pos->lnum); 4676 for (p = line; *p && (unsigned)(p - line) < pos->col; ++p) 4677 p = skip_string(p); 4678 if ((unsigned)(p - line) <= pos->col) 4679 break; 4680 cur_maxcomment = curwin->w_cursor.lnum - pos->lnum - 1; 4681 if (cur_maxcomment <= 0) 4682 { 4683 pos = NULL; 4684 break; 4685 } 4686 } 4687 return pos; 4688 } 4689 4690 /* 4691 * Skip to the end of a "string" and a 'c' character. 4692 * If there is no string or character, return argument unmodified. 4693 */ 4694 static char_u * 4695 skip_string(p) 4696 char_u *p; 4697 { 4698 int i; 4699 4700 /* 4701 * We loop, because strings may be concatenated: "date""time". 4702 */ 4703 for ( ; ; ++p) 4704 { 4705 if (p[0] == '\'') /* 'c' or '\n' or '\000' */ 4706 { 4707 if (!p[1]) /* ' at end of line */ 4708 break; 4709 i = 2; 4710 if (p[1] == '\\') /* '\n' or '\000' */ 4711 { 4712 ++i; 4713 while (vim_isdigit(p[i - 1])) /* '\000' */ 4714 ++i; 4715 } 4716 if (p[i] == '\'') /* check for trailing ' */ 4717 { 4718 p += i; 4719 continue; 4720 } 4721 } 4722 else if (p[0] == '"') /* start of string */ 4723 { 4724 for (++p; p[0]; ++p) 4725 { 4726 if (p[0] == '\\' && p[1] != NUL) 4727 ++p; 4728 else if (p[0] == '"') /* end of string */ 4729 break; 4730 } 4731 if (p[0] == '"') 4732 continue; 4733 } 4734 break; /* no string found */ 4735 } 4736 if (!*p) 4737 --p; /* backup from NUL */ 4738 return p; 4739 } 4740 #endif /* FEAT_CINDENT || FEAT_SYN_HL */ 4741 4742 #if defined(FEAT_CINDENT) || defined(PROTO) 4743 4744 /* 4745 * Do C or expression indenting on the current line. 4746 */ 4747 void 4748 do_c_expr_indent() 4749 { 4750 # ifdef FEAT_EVAL 4751 if (*curbuf->b_p_inde != NUL) 4752 fixthisline(get_expr_indent); 4753 else 4754 # endif 4755 fixthisline(get_c_indent); 4756 } 4757 4758 /* 4759 * Functions for C-indenting. 4760 * Most of this originally comes from Eric Fischer. 4761 */ 4762 /* 4763 * Below "XXX" means that this function may unlock the current line. 4764 */ 4765 4766 static char_u *cin_skipcomment __ARGS((char_u *)); 4767 static int cin_nocode __ARGS((char_u *)); 4768 static pos_T *find_line_comment __ARGS((void)); 4769 static int cin_islabel_skip __ARGS((char_u **)); 4770 static int cin_isdefault __ARGS((char_u *)); 4771 static char_u *after_label __ARGS((char_u *l)); 4772 static int get_indent_nolabel __ARGS((linenr_T lnum)); 4773 static int skip_label __ARGS((linenr_T, char_u **pp, int ind_maxcomment)); 4774 static int cin_first_id_amount __ARGS((void)); 4775 static int cin_get_equal_amount __ARGS((linenr_T lnum)); 4776 static int cin_ispreproc __ARGS((char_u *)); 4777 static int cin_ispreproc_cont __ARGS((char_u **pp, linenr_T *lnump)); 4778 static int cin_iscomment __ARGS((char_u *)); 4779 static int cin_islinecomment __ARGS((char_u *)); 4780 static int cin_isterminated __ARGS((char_u *, int, int)); 4781 static int cin_isinit __ARGS((void)); 4782 static int cin_isfuncdecl __ARGS((char_u **, linenr_T)); 4783 static int cin_isif __ARGS((char_u *)); 4784 static int cin_iselse __ARGS((char_u *)); 4785 static int cin_isdo __ARGS((char_u *)); 4786 static int cin_iswhileofdo __ARGS((char_u *, linenr_T, int)); 4787 static int cin_iswhileofdo_end __ARGS((int terminated, int ind_maxparen, int ind_maxcomment)); 4788 static int cin_isbreak __ARGS((char_u *)); 4789 static int cin_is_cpp_baseclass __ARGS((char_u *line, colnr_T *col)); 4790 static int get_baseclass_amount __ARGS((int col, int ind_maxparen, int ind_maxcomment, int ind_cpp_baseclass)); 4791 static int cin_ends_in __ARGS((char_u *, char_u *, char_u *)); 4792 static int cin_skip2pos __ARGS((pos_T *trypos)); 4793 static pos_T *find_start_brace __ARGS((int)); 4794 static pos_T *find_match_paren __ARGS((int, int)); 4795 static int corr_ind_maxparen __ARGS((int ind_maxparen, pos_T *startpos)); 4796 static int find_last_paren __ARGS((char_u *l, int start, int end)); 4797 static int find_match __ARGS((int lookfor, linenr_T ourscope, int ind_maxparen, int ind_maxcomment)); 4798 4799 static int ind_hash_comment = 0; /* # starts a comment */ 4800 4801 /* 4802 * Skip over white space and C comments within the line. 4803 * Also skip over Perl/shell comments if desired. 4804 */ 4805 static char_u * 4806 cin_skipcomment(s) 4807 char_u *s; 4808 { 4809 while (*s) 4810 { 4811 char_u *prev_s = s; 4812 4813 s = skipwhite(s); 4814 4815 /* Perl/shell # comment comment continues until eol. Require a space 4816 * before # to avoid recognizing $#array. */ 4817 if (ind_hash_comment != 0 && s != prev_s && *s == '#') 4818 { 4819 s += STRLEN(s); 4820 break; 4821 } 4822 if (*s != '/') 4823 break; 4824 ++s; 4825 if (*s == '/') /* slash-slash comment continues till eol */ 4826 { 4827 s += STRLEN(s); 4828 break; 4829 } 4830 if (*s != '*') 4831 break; 4832 for (++s; *s; ++s) /* skip slash-star comment */ 4833 if (s[0] == '*' && s[1] == '/') 4834 { 4835 s += 2; 4836 break; 4837 } 4838 } 4839 return s; 4840 } 4841 4842 /* 4843 * Return TRUE if there there is no code at *s. White space and comments are 4844 * not considered code. 4845 */ 4846 static int 4847 cin_nocode(s) 4848 char_u *s; 4849 { 4850 return *cin_skipcomment(s) == NUL; 4851 } 4852 4853 /* 4854 * Check previous lines for a "//" line comment, skipping over blank lines. 4855 */ 4856 static pos_T * 4857 find_line_comment() /* XXX */ 4858 { 4859 static pos_T pos; 4860 char_u *line; 4861 char_u *p; 4862 4863 pos = curwin->w_cursor; 4864 while (--pos.lnum > 0) 4865 { 4866 line = ml_get(pos.lnum); 4867 p = skipwhite(line); 4868 if (cin_islinecomment(p)) 4869 { 4870 pos.col = (int)(p - line); 4871 return &pos; 4872 } 4873 if (*p != NUL) 4874 break; 4875 } 4876 return NULL; 4877 } 4878 4879 /* 4880 * Check if string matches "label:"; move to character after ':' if true. 4881 */ 4882 static int 4883 cin_islabel_skip(s) 4884 char_u **s; 4885 { 4886 if (!vim_isIDc(**s)) /* need at least one ID character */ 4887 return FALSE; 4888 4889 while (vim_isIDc(**s)) 4890 (*s)++; 4891 4892 *s = cin_skipcomment(*s); 4893 4894 /* "::" is not a label, it's C++ */ 4895 return (**s == ':' && *++*s != ':'); 4896 } 4897 4898 /* 4899 * Recognize a label: "label:". 4900 * Note: curwin->w_cursor must be where we are looking for the label. 4901 */ 4902 int 4903 cin_islabel(ind_maxcomment) /* XXX */ 4904 int ind_maxcomment; 4905 { 4906 char_u *s; 4907 4908 s = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline()); 4909 4910 /* 4911 * Exclude "default" from labels, since it should be indented 4912 * like a switch label. Same for C++ scope declarations. 4913 */ 4914 if (cin_isdefault(s)) 4915 return FALSE; 4916 if (cin_isscopedecl(s)) 4917 return FALSE; 4918 4919 if (cin_islabel_skip(&s)) 4920 { 4921 /* 4922 * Only accept a label if the previous line is terminated or is a case 4923 * label. 4924 */ 4925 pos_T cursor_save; 4926 pos_T *trypos; 4927 char_u *line; 4928 4929 cursor_save = curwin->w_cursor; 4930 while (curwin->w_cursor.lnum > 1) 4931 { 4932 --curwin->w_cursor.lnum; 4933 4934 /* 4935 * If we're in a comment now, skip to the start of the comment. 4936 */ 4937 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0; 4938 if ((trypos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL) /* XXX */ 4939 curwin->w_cursor = *trypos; 4940 4941 line = ml_get_curline(); 4942 if (cin_ispreproc(line)) /* ignore #defines, #if, etc. */ 4943 continue; 4944 if (*(line = cin_skipcomment(line)) == NUL) 4945 continue; 4946 4947 curwin->w_cursor = cursor_save; 4948 if (cin_isterminated(line, TRUE, FALSE) 4949 || cin_isscopedecl(line) 4950 || cin_iscase(line) 4951 || (cin_islabel_skip(&line) && cin_nocode(line))) 4952 return TRUE; 4953 return FALSE; 4954 } 4955 curwin->w_cursor = cursor_save; 4956 return TRUE; /* label at start of file??? */ 4957 } 4958 return FALSE; 4959 } 4960 4961 /* 4962 * Recognize structure initialization and enumerations. 4963 * Q&D-Implementation: 4964 * check for "=" at end or "[typedef] enum" at beginning of line. 4965 */ 4966 static int 4967 cin_isinit(void) 4968 { 4969 char_u *s; 4970 4971 s = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline()); 4972 4973 if (STRNCMP(s, "typedef", 7) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(s[7])) 4974 s = cin_skipcomment(s + 7); 4975 4976 if (STRNCMP(s, "enum", 4) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(s[4])) 4977 return TRUE; 4978 4979 if (cin_ends_in(s, (char_u *)"=", (char_u *)"{")) 4980 return TRUE; 4981 4982 return FALSE; 4983 } 4984 4985 /* 4986 * Recognize a switch label: "case .*:" or "default:". 4987 */ 4988 int 4989 cin_iscase(s) 4990 char_u *s; 4991 { 4992 s = cin_skipcomment(s); 4993 if (STRNCMP(s, "case", 4) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(s[4])) 4994 { 4995 for (s += 4; *s; ++s) 4996 { 4997 s = cin_skipcomment(s); 4998 if (*s == ':') 4999 { 5000 if (s[1] == ':') /* skip over "::" for C++ */ 5001 ++s; 5002 else 5003 return TRUE; 5004 } 5005 if (*s == '\'' && s[1] && s[2] == '\'') 5006 s += 2; /* skip over '.' */ 5007 else if (*s == '/' && (s[1] == '*' || s[1] == '/')) 5008 return FALSE; /* stop at comment */ 5009 else if (*s == '"') 5010 return FALSE; /* stop at string */ 5011 } 5012 return FALSE; 5013 } 5014 5015 if (cin_isdefault(s)) 5016 return TRUE; 5017 return FALSE; 5018 } 5019 5020 /* 5021 * Recognize a "default" switch label. 5022 */ 5023 static int 5024 cin_isdefault(s) 5025 char_u *s; 5026 { 5027 return (STRNCMP(s, "default", 7) == 0 5028 && *(s = cin_skipcomment(s + 7)) == ':' 5029 && s[1] != ':'); 5030 } 5031 5032 /* 5033 * Recognize a "public/private/proctected" scope declaration label. 5034 */ 5035 int 5036 cin_isscopedecl(s) 5037 char_u *s; 5038 { 5039 int i; 5040 5041 s = cin_skipcomment(s); 5042 if (STRNCMP(s, "public", 6) == 0) 5043 i = 6; 5044 else if (STRNCMP(s, "protected", 9) == 0) 5045 i = 9; 5046 else if (STRNCMP(s, "private", 7) == 0) 5047 i = 7; 5048 else 5049 return FALSE; 5050 return (*(s = cin_skipcomment(s + i)) == ':' && s[1] != ':'); 5051 } 5052 5053 /* 5054 * Return a pointer to the first non-empty non-comment character after a ':'. 5055 * Return NULL if not found. 5056 * case 234: a = b; 5057 * ^ 5058 */ 5059 static char_u * 5060 after_label(l) 5061 char_u *l; 5062 { 5063 for ( ; *l; ++l) 5064 { 5065 if (*l == ':') 5066 { 5067 if (l[1] == ':') /* skip over "::" for C++ */ 5068 ++l; 5069 else if (!cin_iscase(l + 1)) 5070 break; 5071 } 5072 else if (*l == '\'' && l[1] && l[2] == '\'') 5073 l += 2; /* skip over 'x' */ 5074 } 5075 if (*l == NUL) 5076 return NULL; 5077 l = cin_skipcomment(l + 1); 5078 if (*l == NUL) 5079 return NULL; 5080 return l; 5081 } 5082 5083 /* 5084 * Get indent of line "lnum", skipping a label. 5085 * Return 0 if there is nothing after the label. 5086 */ 5087 static int 5088 get_indent_nolabel(lnum) /* XXX */ 5089 linenr_T lnum; 5090 { 5091 char_u *l; 5092 pos_T fp; 5093 colnr_T col; 5094 char_u *p; 5095 5096 l = ml_get(lnum); 5097 p = after_label(l); 5098 if (p == NULL) 5099 return 0; 5100 5101 fp.col = (colnr_T)(p - l); 5102 fp.lnum = lnum; 5103 getvcol(curwin, &fp, &col, NULL, NULL); 5104 return (int)col; 5105 } 5106 5107 /* 5108 * Find indent for line "lnum", ignoring any case or jump label. 5109 * Also return a pointer to the text (after the label) in "pp". 5110 * label: if (asdf && asdfasdf) 5111 * ^ 5112 */ 5113 static int 5114 skip_label(lnum, pp, ind_maxcomment) 5115 linenr_T lnum; 5116 char_u **pp; 5117 int ind_maxcomment; 5118 { 5119 char_u *l; 5120 int amount; 5121 pos_T cursor_save; 5122 5123 cursor_save = curwin->w_cursor; 5124 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = lnum; 5125 l = ml_get_curline(); 5126 /* XXX */ 5127 if (cin_iscase(l) || cin_isscopedecl(l) || cin_islabel(ind_maxcomment)) 5128 { 5129 amount = get_indent_nolabel(lnum); 5130 l = after_label(ml_get_curline()); 5131 if (l == NULL) /* just in case */ 5132 l = ml_get_curline(); 5133 } 5134 else 5135 { 5136 amount = get_indent(); 5137 l = ml_get_curline(); 5138 } 5139 *pp = l; 5140 5141 curwin->w_cursor = cursor_save; 5142 return amount; 5143 } 5144 5145 /* 5146 * Return the indent of the first variable name after a type in a declaration. 5147 * int a, indent of "a" 5148 * static struct foo b, indent of "b" 5149 * enum bla c, indent of "c" 5150 * Returns zero when it doesn't look like a declaration. 5151 */ 5152 static int 5153 cin_first_id_amount() 5154 { 5155 char_u *line, *p, *s; 5156 int len; 5157 pos_T fp; 5158 colnr_T col; 5159 5160 line = ml_get_curline(); 5161 p = skipwhite(line); 5162 len = (int)(skiptowhite(p) - p); 5163 if (len == 6 && STRNCMP(p, "static", 6) == 0) 5164 { 5165 p = skipwhite(p + 6); 5166 len = (int)(skiptowhite(p) - p); 5167 } 5168 if (len == 6 && STRNCMP(p, "struct", 6) == 0) 5169 p = skipwhite(p + 6); 5170 else if (len == 4 && STRNCMP(p, "enum", 4) == 0) 5171 p = skipwhite(p + 4); 5172 else if ((len == 8 && STRNCMP(p, "unsigned", 8) == 0) 5173 || (len == 6 && STRNCMP(p, "signed", 6) == 0)) 5174 { 5175 s = skipwhite(p + len); 5176 if ((STRNCMP(s, "int", 3) == 0 && vim_iswhite(s[3])) 5177 || (STRNCMP(s, "long", 4) == 0 && vim_iswhite(s[4])) 5178 || (STRNCMP(s, "short", 5) == 0 && vim_iswhite(s[5])) 5179 || (STRNCMP(s, "char", 4) == 0 && vim_iswhite(s[4]))) 5180 p = s; 5181 } 5182 for (len = 0; vim_isIDc(p[len]); ++len) 5183 ; 5184 if (len == 0 || !vim_iswhite(p[len]) || cin_nocode(p)) 5185 return 0; 5186 5187 p = skipwhite(p + len); 5188 fp.lnum = curwin->w_cursor.lnum; 5189 fp.col = (colnr_T)(p - line); 5190 getvcol(curwin, &fp, &col, NULL, NULL); 5191 return (int)col; 5192 } 5193 5194 /* 5195 * Return the indent of the first non-blank after an equal sign. 5196 * char *foo = "here"; 5197 * Return zero if no (useful) equal sign found. 5198 * Return -1 if the line above "lnum" ends in a backslash. 5199 * foo = "asdf\ 5200 * asdf\ 5201 * here"; 5202 */ 5203 static int 5204 cin_get_equal_amount(lnum) 5205 linenr_T lnum; 5206 { 5207 char_u *line; 5208 char_u *s; 5209 colnr_T col; 5210 pos_T fp; 5211 5212 if (lnum > 1) 5213 { 5214 line = ml_get(lnum - 1); 5215 if (*line != NUL && line[STRLEN(line) - 1] == '\\') 5216 return -1; 5217 } 5218 5219 line = s = ml_get(lnum); 5220 while (*s != NUL && vim_strchr((char_u *)"=;{}\"'", *s) == NULL) 5221 { 5222 if (cin_iscomment(s)) /* ignore comments */ 5223 s = cin_skipcomment(s); 5224 else 5225 ++s; 5226 } 5227 if (*s != '=') 5228 return 0; 5229 5230 s = skipwhite(s + 1); 5231 if (cin_nocode(s)) 5232 return 0; 5233 5234 if (*s == '"') /* nice alignment for continued strings */ 5235 ++s; 5236 5237 fp.lnum = lnum; 5238 fp.col = (colnr_T)(s - line); 5239 getvcol(curwin, &fp, &col, NULL, NULL); 5240 return (int)col; 5241 } 5242 5243 /* 5244 * Recognize a preprocessor statement: Any line that starts with '#'. 5245 */ 5246 static int 5247 cin_ispreproc(s) 5248 char_u *s; 5249 { 5250 s = skipwhite(s); 5251 if (*s == '#') 5252 return TRUE; 5253 return FALSE; 5254 } 5255 5256 /* 5257 * Return TRUE if line "*pp" at "*lnump" is a preprocessor statement or a 5258 * continuation line of a preprocessor statement. Decrease "*lnump" to the 5259 * start and return the line in "*pp". 5260 */ 5261 static int 5262 cin_ispreproc_cont(pp, lnump) 5263 char_u **pp; 5264 linenr_T *lnump; 5265 { 5266 char_u *line = *pp; 5267 linenr_T lnum = *lnump; 5268 int retval = FALSE; 5269 5270 for (;;) 5271 { 5272 if (cin_ispreproc(line)) 5273 { 5274 retval = TRUE; 5275 *lnump = lnum; 5276 break; 5277 } 5278 if (lnum == 1) 5279 break; 5280 line = ml_get(--lnum); 5281 if (*line == NUL || line[STRLEN(line) - 1] != '\\') 5282 break; 5283 } 5284 5285 if (lnum != *lnump) 5286 *pp = ml_get(*lnump); 5287 return retval; 5288 } 5289 5290 /* 5291 * Recognize the start of a C or C++ comment. 5292 */ 5293 static int 5294 cin_iscomment(p) 5295 char_u *p; 5296 { 5297 return (p[0] == '/' && (p[1] == '*' || p[1] == '/')); 5298 } 5299 5300 /* 5301 * Recognize the start of a "//" comment. 5302 */ 5303 static int 5304 cin_islinecomment(p) 5305 char_u *p; 5306 { 5307 return (p[0] == '/' && p[1] == '/'); 5308 } 5309 5310 /* 5311 * Recognize a line that starts with '{' or '}', or ends with ';', '{' or '}'. 5312 * Don't consider "} else" a terminated line. 5313 * Return the character terminating the line (ending char's have precedence if 5314 * both apply in order to determine initializations). 5315 */ 5316 static int 5317 cin_isterminated(s, incl_open, incl_comma) 5318 char_u *s; 5319 int incl_open; /* include '{' at the end as terminator */ 5320 int incl_comma; /* recognize a trailing comma */ 5321 { 5322 char_u found_start = 0; 5323 5324 s = cin_skipcomment(s); 5325 5326 if (*s == '{' || (*s == '}' && !cin_iselse(s))) 5327 found_start = *s; 5328 5329 while (*s) 5330 { 5331 /* skip over comments, "" strings and 'c'haracters */ 5332 s = skip_string(cin_skipcomment(s)); 5333 if ((*s == ';' || (incl_open && *s == '{') || *s == '}' 5334 || (incl_comma && *s == ',')) 5335 && cin_nocode(s + 1)) 5336 return *s; 5337 5338 if (*s) 5339 s++; 5340 } 5341 return found_start; 5342 } 5343 5344 /* 5345 * Recognize the basic picture of a function declaration -- it needs to 5346 * have an open paren somewhere and a close paren at the end of the line and 5347 * no semicolons anywhere. 5348 * When a line ends in a comma we continue looking in the next line. 5349 * "sp" points to a string with the line. When looking at other lines it must 5350 * be restored to the line. When it's NULL fetch lines here. 5351 * "lnum" is where we start looking. 5352 */ 5353 static int 5354 cin_isfuncdecl(sp, first_lnum) 5355 char_u **sp; 5356 linenr_T first_lnum; 5357 { 5358 char_u *s; 5359 linenr_T lnum = first_lnum; 5360 int retval = FALSE; 5361 5362 if (sp == NULL) 5363 s = ml_get(lnum); 5364 else 5365 s = *sp; 5366 5367 while (*s && *s != '(' && *s != ';' && *s != '\'' && *s != '"') 5368 { 5369 if (cin_iscomment(s)) /* ignore comments */ 5370 s = cin_skipcomment(s); 5371 else 5372 ++s; 5373 } 5374 if (*s != '(') 5375 return FALSE; /* ';', ' or " before any () or no '(' */ 5376 5377 while (*s && *s != ';' && *s != '\'' && *s != '"') 5378 { 5379 if (*s == ')' && cin_nocode(s + 1)) 5380 { 5381 /* ')' at the end: may have found a match 5382 * Check for he previous line not to end in a backslash: 5383 * #if defined(x) && \ 5384 * defined(y) 5385 */ 5386 lnum = first_lnum - 1; 5387 s = ml_get(lnum); 5388 if (*s == NUL || s[STRLEN(s) - 1] != '\\') 5389 retval = TRUE; 5390 goto done; 5391 } 5392 if (*s == ',' && cin_nocode(s + 1)) 5393 { 5394 /* ',' at the end: continue looking in the next line */ 5395 if (lnum >= curbuf->b_ml.ml_line_count) 5396 break; 5397 5398 s = ml_get(++lnum); 5399 } 5400 else if (cin_iscomment(s)) /* ignore comments */ 5401 s = cin_skipcomment(s); 5402 else 5403 ++s; 5404 } 5405 5406 done: 5407 if (lnum != first_lnum && sp != NULL) 5408 *sp = ml_get(first_lnum); 5409 5410 return retval; 5411 } 5412 5413 static int 5414 cin_isif(p) 5415 char_u *p; 5416 { 5417 return (STRNCMP(p, "if", 2) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(p[2])); 5418 } 5419 5420 static int 5421 cin_iselse(p) 5422 char_u *p; 5423 { 5424 if (*p == '}') /* accept "} else" */ 5425 p = cin_skipcomment(p + 1); 5426 return (STRNCMP(p, "else", 4) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(p[4])); 5427 } 5428 5429 static int 5430 cin_isdo(p) 5431 char_u *p; 5432 { 5433 return (STRNCMP(p, "do", 2) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(p[2])); 5434 } 5435 5436 /* 5437 * Check if this is a "while" that should have a matching "do". 5438 * We only accept a "while (condition) ;", with only white space between the 5439 * ')' and ';'. The condition may be spread over several lines. 5440 */ 5441 static int 5442 cin_iswhileofdo(p, lnum, ind_maxparen) /* XXX */ 5443 char_u *p; 5444 linenr_T lnum; 5445 int ind_maxparen; 5446 { 5447 pos_T cursor_save; 5448 pos_T *trypos; 5449 int retval = FALSE; 5450 5451 p = cin_skipcomment(p); 5452 if (*p == '}') /* accept "} while (cond);" */ 5453 p = cin_skipcomment(p + 1); 5454 if (STRNCMP(p, "while", 5) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(p[5])) 5455 { 5456 cursor_save = curwin->w_cursor; 5457 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = lnum; 5458 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0; 5459 p = ml_get_curline(); 5460 while (*p && *p != 'w') /* skip any '}', until the 'w' of the "while" */ 5461 { 5462 ++p; 5463 ++curwin->w_cursor.col; 5464 } 5465 if ((trypos = findmatchlimit(NULL, 0, 0, ind_maxparen)) != NULL 5466 && *cin_skipcomment(ml_get_pos(trypos) + 1) == ';') 5467 retval = TRUE; 5468 curwin->w_cursor = cursor_save; 5469 } 5470 return retval; 5471 } 5472 5473 /* 5474 * Return TRUE if we are at the end of a do-while. 5475 * do 5476 * nothing; 5477 * while (foo 5478 * && bar); <-- here 5479 * Adjust the cursor to the line with "while". 5480 */ 5481 static int 5482 cin_iswhileofdo_end(terminated, ind_maxparen, ind_maxcomment) 5483 int terminated; 5484 int ind_maxparen; 5485 int ind_maxcomment; 5486 { 5487 char_u *line; 5488 char_u *p; 5489 char_u *s; 5490 pos_T *trypos; 5491 int i; 5492 5493 if (terminated != ';') /* there must be a ';' at the end */ 5494 return FALSE; 5495 5496 p = line = ml_get_curline(); 5497 while (*p != NUL) 5498 { 5499 p = cin_skipcomment(p); 5500 if (*p == ')') 5501 { 5502 s = skipwhite(p + 1); 5503 if (*s == ';' && cin_nocode(s + 1)) 5504 { 5505 /* Found ");" at end of the line, now check there is "while" 5506 * before the matching '('. XXX */ 5507 i = (int)(p - line); 5508 curwin->w_cursor.col = i; 5509 trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen, ind_maxcomment); 5510 if (trypos != NULL) 5511 { 5512 s = cin_skipcomment(ml_get(trypos->lnum)); 5513 if (*s == '}') /* accept "} while (cond);" */ 5514 s = cin_skipcomment(s + 1); 5515 if (STRNCMP(s, "while", 5) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(s[5])) 5516 { 5517 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum; 5518 return TRUE; 5519 } 5520 } 5521 5522 /* Searching may have made "line" invalid, get it again. */ 5523 line = ml_get_curline(); 5524 p = line + i; 5525 } 5526 } 5527 if (*p != NUL) 5528 ++p; 5529 } 5530 return FALSE; 5531 } 5532 5533 static int 5534 cin_isbreak(p) 5535 char_u *p; 5536 { 5537 return (STRNCMP(p, "break", 5) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(p[5])); 5538 } 5539 5540 /* 5541 * Find the position of a C++ base-class declaration or 5542 * constructor-initialization. eg: 5543 * 5544 * class MyClass : 5545 * baseClass <-- here 5546 * class MyClass : public baseClass, 5547 * anotherBaseClass <-- here (should probably lineup ??) 5548 * MyClass::MyClass(...) : 5549 * baseClass(...) <-- here (constructor-initialization) 5550 * 5551 * This is a lot of guessing. Watch out for "cond ? func() : foo". 5552 */ 5553 static int 5554 cin_is_cpp_baseclass(line, col) 5555 char_u *line; 5556 colnr_T *col; /* return: column to align with */ 5557 { 5558 char_u *s; 5559 int class_or_struct, lookfor_ctor_init, cpp_base_class; 5560 linenr_T lnum = curwin->w_cursor.lnum; 5561 5562 *col = 0; 5563 5564 s = skipwhite(line); 5565 if (*s == '#') /* skip #define FOO x ? (x) : x */ 5566 return FALSE; 5567 s = cin_skipcomment(s); 5568 if (*s == NUL) 5569 return FALSE; 5570 5571 cpp_base_class = lookfor_ctor_init = class_or_struct = FALSE; 5572 5573 /* Search for a line starting with '#', empty, ending in ';' or containing 5574 * '{' or '}' and start below it. This handles the following situations: 5575 * a = cond ? 5576 * func() : 5577 * asdf; 5578 * func::foo() 5579 * : something 5580 * {} 5581 * Foo::Foo (int one, int two) 5582 * : something(4), 5583 * somethingelse(3) 5584 * {} 5585 */ 5586 while (lnum > 1) 5587 { 5588 s = skipwhite(ml_get(lnum - 1)); 5589 if (*s == '#' || *s == NUL) 5590 break; 5591 while (*s != NUL) 5592 { 5593 s = cin_skipcomment(s); 5594 if (*s == '{' || *s == '}' 5595 || (*s == ';' && cin_nocode(s + 1))) 5596 break; 5597 if (*s != NUL) 5598 ++s; 5599 } 5600 if (*s != NUL) 5601 break; 5602 --lnum; 5603 } 5604 5605 s = cin_skipcomment(ml_get(lnum)); 5606 for (;;) 5607 { 5608 if (*s == NUL) 5609 { 5610 if (lnum == curwin->w_cursor.lnum) 5611 break; 5612 /* Continue in the cursor line. */ 5613 s = cin_skipcomment(ml_get(++lnum)); 5614 } 5615 5616 if (s[0] == ':') 5617 { 5618 if (s[1] == ':') 5619 { 5620 /* skip double colon. It can't be a constructor 5621 * initialization any more */ 5622 lookfor_ctor_init = FALSE; 5623 s = cin_skipcomment(s + 2); 5624 } 5625 else if (lookfor_ctor_init || class_or_struct) 5626 { 5627 /* we have something found, that looks like the start of 5628 * cpp-base-class-declaration or contructor-initialization */ 5629 cpp_base_class = TRUE; 5630 lookfor_ctor_init = class_or_struct = FALSE; 5631 *col = 0; 5632 s = cin_skipcomment(s + 1); 5633 } 5634 else 5635 s = cin_skipcomment(s + 1); 5636 } 5637 else if ((STRNCMP(s, "class", 5) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(s[5])) 5638 || (STRNCMP(s, "struct", 6) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(s[6]))) 5639 { 5640 class_or_struct = TRUE; 5641 lookfor_ctor_init = FALSE; 5642 5643 if (*s == 'c') 5644 s = cin_skipcomment(s + 5); 5645 else 5646 s = cin_skipcomment(s + 6); 5647 } 5648 else 5649 { 5650 if (s[0] == '{' || s[0] == '}' || s[0] == ';') 5651 { 5652 cpp_base_class = lookfor_ctor_init = class_or_struct = FALSE; 5653 } 5654 else if (s[0] == ')') 5655 { 5656 /* Constructor-initialization is assumed if we come across 5657 * something like "):" */ 5658 class_or_struct = FALSE; 5659 lookfor_ctor_init = TRUE; 5660 } 5661 else if (s[0] == '?') 5662 { 5663 /* Avoid seeing '() :' after '?' as constructor init. */ 5664 return FALSE; 5665 } 5666 else if (!vim_isIDc(s[0])) 5667 { 5668 /* if it is not an identifier, we are wrong */ 5669 class_or_struct = FALSE; 5670 lookfor_ctor_init = FALSE; 5671 } 5672 else if (*col == 0) 5673 { 5674 /* it can't be a constructor-initialization any more */ 5675 lookfor_ctor_init = FALSE; 5676 5677 /* the first statement starts here: lineup with this one... */ 5678 if (cpp_base_class) 5679 *col = (colnr_T)(s - line); 5680 } 5681 5682 /* When the line ends in a comma don't align with it. */ 5683 if (lnum == curwin->w_cursor.lnum && *s == ',' && cin_nocode(s + 1)) 5684 *col = 0; 5685 5686 s = cin_skipcomment(s + 1); 5687 } 5688 } 5689 5690 return cpp_base_class; 5691 } 5692 5693 static int 5694 get_baseclass_amount(col, ind_maxparen, ind_maxcomment, ind_cpp_baseclass) 5695 int col; 5696 int ind_maxparen; 5697 int ind_maxcomment; 5698 int ind_cpp_baseclass; 5699 { 5700 int amount; 5701 colnr_T vcol; 5702 pos_T *trypos; 5703 5704 if (col == 0) 5705 { 5706 amount = get_indent(); 5707 if (find_last_paren(ml_get_curline(), '(', ')') 5708 && (trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen, 5709 ind_maxcomment)) != NULL) 5710 amount = get_indent_lnum(trypos->lnum); /* XXX */ 5711 if (!cin_ends_in(ml_get_curline(), (char_u *)",", NULL)) 5712 amount += ind_cpp_baseclass; 5713 } 5714 else 5715 { 5716 curwin->w_cursor.col = col; 5717 getvcol(curwin, &curwin->w_cursor, &vcol, NULL, NULL); 5718 amount = (int)vcol; 5719 } 5720 if (amount < ind_cpp_baseclass) 5721 amount = ind_cpp_baseclass; 5722 return amount; 5723 } 5724 5725 /* 5726 * Return TRUE if string "s" ends with the string "find", possibly followed by 5727 * white space and comments. Skip strings and comments. 5728 * Ignore "ignore" after "find" if it's not NULL. 5729 */ 5730 static int 5731 cin_ends_in(s, find, ignore) 5732 char_u *s; 5733 char_u *find; 5734 char_u *ignore; 5735 { 5736 char_u *p = s; 5737 char_u *r; 5738 int len = (int)STRLEN(find); 5739 5740 while (*p != NUL) 5741 { 5742 p = cin_skipcomment(p); 5743 if (STRNCMP(p, find, len) == 0) 5744 { 5745 r = skipwhite(p + len); 5746 if (ignore != NULL && STRNCMP(r, ignore, STRLEN(ignore)) == 0) 5747 r = skipwhite(r + STRLEN(ignore)); 5748 if (cin_nocode(r)) 5749 return TRUE; 5750 } 5751 if (*p != NUL) 5752 ++p; 5753 } 5754 return FALSE; 5755 } 5756 5757 /* 5758 * Skip strings, chars and comments until at or past "trypos". 5759 * Return the column found. 5760 */ 5761 static int 5762 cin_skip2pos(trypos) 5763 pos_T *trypos; 5764 { 5765 char_u *line; 5766 char_u *p; 5767 5768 p = line = ml_get(trypos->lnum); 5769 while (*p && (colnr_T)(p - line) < trypos->col) 5770 { 5771 if (cin_iscomment(p)) 5772 p = cin_skipcomment(p); 5773 else 5774 { 5775 p = skip_string(p); 5776 ++p; 5777 } 5778 } 5779 return (int)(p - line); 5780 } 5781 5782 /* 5783 * Find the '{' at the start of the block we are in. 5784 * Return NULL if no match found. 5785 * Ignore a '{' that is in a comment, makes indenting the next three lines 5786 * work. */ 5787 /* foo() */ 5788 /* { */ 5789 /* } */ 5790 5791 static pos_T * 5792 find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment) /* XXX */ 5793 int ind_maxcomment; 5794 { 5795 pos_T cursor_save; 5796 pos_T *trypos; 5797 pos_T *pos; 5798 static pos_T pos_copy; 5799 5800 cursor_save = curwin->w_cursor; 5801 while ((trypos = findmatchlimit(NULL, '{', FM_BLOCKSTOP, 0)) != NULL) 5802 { 5803 pos_copy = *trypos; /* copy pos_T, next findmatch will change it */ 5804 trypos = &pos_copy; 5805 curwin->w_cursor = *trypos; 5806 pos = NULL; 5807 /* ignore the { if it's in a // or / * * / comment */ 5808 if ((colnr_T)cin_skip2pos(trypos) == trypos->col 5809 && (pos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment)) == NULL) /* XXX */ 5810 break; 5811 if (pos != NULL) 5812 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = pos->lnum; 5813 } 5814 curwin->w_cursor = cursor_save; 5815 return trypos; 5816 } 5817 5818 /* 5819 * Find the matching '(', failing if it is in a comment. 5820 * Return NULL of no match found. 5821 */ 5822 static pos_T * 5823 find_match_paren(ind_maxparen, ind_maxcomment) /* XXX */ 5824 int ind_maxparen; 5825 int ind_maxcomment; 5826 { 5827 pos_T cursor_save; 5828 pos_T *trypos; 5829 static pos_T pos_copy; 5830 5831 cursor_save = curwin->w_cursor; 5832 if ((trypos = findmatchlimit(NULL, '(', 0, ind_maxparen)) != NULL) 5833 { 5834 /* check if the ( is in a // comment */ 5835 if ((colnr_T)cin_skip2pos(trypos) > trypos->col) 5836 trypos = NULL; 5837 else 5838 { 5839 pos_copy = *trypos; /* copy trypos, findmatch will change it */ 5840 trypos = &pos_copy; 5841 curwin->w_cursor = *trypos; 5842 if (find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment) != NULL) /* XXX */ 5843 trypos = NULL; 5844 } 5845 } 5846 curwin->w_cursor = cursor_save; 5847 return trypos; 5848 } 5849 5850 /* 5851 * Return ind_maxparen corrected for the difference in line number between the 5852 * cursor position and "startpos". This makes sure that searching for a 5853 * matching paren above the cursor line doesn't find a match because of 5854 * looking a few lines further. 5855 */ 5856 static int 5857 corr_ind_maxparen(ind_maxparen, startpos) 5858 int ind_maxparen; 5859 pos_T *startpos; 5860 { 5861 long n = (long)startpos->lnum - (long)curwin->w_cursor.lnum; 5862 5863 if (n > 0 && n < ind_maxparen / 2) 5864 return ind_maxparen - (int)n; 5865 return ind_maxparen; 5866 } 5867 5868 /* 5869 * Set w_cursor.col to the column number of the last unmatched ')' or '{' in 5870 * line "l". 5871 */ 5872 static int 5873 find_last_paren(l, start, end) 5874 char_u *l; 5875 int start, end; 5876 { 5877 int i; 5878 int retval = FALSE; 5879 int open_count = 0; 5880 5881 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0; /* default is start of line */ 5882 5883 for (i = 0; l[i]; i++) 5884 { 5885 i = (int)(cin_skipcomment(l + i) - l); /* ignore parens in comments */ 5886 i = (int)(skip_string(l + i) - l); /* ignore parens in quotes */ 5887 if (l[i] == start) 5888 ++open_count; 5889 else if (l[i] == end) 5890 { 5891 if (open_count > 0) 5892 --open_count; 5893 else 5894 { 5895 curwin->w_cursor.col = i; 5896 retval = TRUE; 5897 } 5898 } 5899 } 5900 return retval; 5901 } 5902 5903 int 5904 get_c_indent() 5905 { 5906 /* 5907 * spaces from a block's opening brace the prevailing indent for that 5908 * block should be 5909 */ 5910 int ind_level = curbuf->b_p_sw; 5911 5912 /* 5913 * spaces from the edge of the line an open brace that's at the end of a 5914 * line is imagined to be. 5915 */ 5916 int ind_open_imag = 0; 5917 5918 /* 5919 * spaces from the prevailing indent for a line that is not precededof by 5920 * an opening brace. 5921 */ 5922 int ind_no_brace = 0; 5923 5924 /* 5925 * column where the first { of a function should be located } 5926 */ 5927 int ind_first_open = 0; 5928 5929 /* 5930 * spaces from the prevailing indent a leftmost open brace should be 5931 * located 5932 */ 5933 int ind_open_extra = 0; 5934 5935 /* 5936 * spaces from the matching open brace (real location for one at the left 5937 * edge; imaginary location from one that ends a line) the matching close 5938 * brace should be located 5939 */ 5940 int ind_close_extra = 0; 5941 5942 /* 5943 * spaces from the edge of the line an open brace sitting in the leftmost 5944 * column is imagined to be 5945 */ 5946 int ind_open_left_imag = 0; 5947 5948 /* 5949 * spaces from the switch() indent a "case xx" label should be located 5950 */ 5951 int ind_case = curbuf->b_p_sw; 5952 5953 /* 5954 * spaces from the "case xx:" code after a switch() should be located 5955 */ 5956 int ind_case_code = curbuf->b_p_sw; 5957 5958 /* 5959 * lineup break at end of case in switch() with case label 5960 */ 5961 int ind_case_break = 0; 5962 5963 /* 5964 * spaces from the class declaration indent a scope declaration label 5965 * should be located 5966 */ 5967 int ind_scopedecl = curbuf->b_p_sw; 5968 5969 /* 5970 * spaces from the scope declaration label code should be located 5971 */ 5972 int ind_scopedecl_code = curbuf->b_p_sw; 5973 5974 /* 5975 * amount K&R-style parameters should be indented 5976 */ 5977 int ind_param = curbuf->b_p_sw; 5978 5979 /* 5980 * amount a function type spec should be indented 5981 */ 5982 int ind_func_type = curbuf->b_p_sw; 5983 5984 /* 5985 * amount a cpp base class declaration or constructor initialization 5986 * should be indented 5987 */ 5988 int ind_cpp_baseclass = curbuf->b_p_sw; 5989 5990 /* 5991 * additional spaces beyond the prevailing indent a continuation line 5992 * should be located 5993 */ 5994 int ind_continuation = curbuf->b_p_sw; 5995 5996 /* 5997 * spaces from the indent of the line with an unclosed parentheses 5998 */ 5999 int ind_unclosed = curbuf->b_p_sw * 2; 6000 6001 /* 6002 * spaces from the indent of the line with an unclosed parentheses, which 6003 * itself is also unclosed 6004 */ 6005 int ind_unclosed2 = curbuf->b_p_sw; 6006 6007 /* 6008 * suppress ignoring spaces from the indent of a line starting with an 6009 * unclosed parentheses. 6010 */ 6011 int ind_unclosed_noignore = 0; 6012 6013 /* 6014 * If the opening paren is the last nonwhite character on the line, and 6015 * ind_unclosed_wrapped is nonzero, use this indent relative to the outer 6016 * context (for very long lines). 6017 */ 6018 int ind_unclosed_wrapped = 0; 6019 6020 /* 6021 * suppress ignoring white space when lining up with the character after 6022 * an unclosed parentheses. 6023 */ 6024 int ind_unclosed_whiteok = 0; 6025 6026 /* 6027 * indent a closing parentheses under the line start of the matching 6028 * opening parentheses. 6029 */ 6030 int ind_matching_paren = 0; 6031 6032 /* 6033 * indent a closing parentheses under the previous line. 6034 */ 6035 int ind_paren_prev = 0; 6036 6037 /* 6038 * Extra indent for comments. 6039 */ 6040 int ind_comment = 0; 6041 6042 /* 6043 * spaces from the comment opener when there is nothing after it. 6044 */ 6045 int ind_in_comment = 3; 6046 6047 /* 6048 * boolean: if non-zero, use ind_in_comment even if there is something 6049 * after the comment opener. 6050 */ 6051 int ind_in_comment2 = 0; 6052 6053 /* 6054 * max lines to search for an open paren 6055 */ 6056 int ind_maxparen = 20; 6057 6058 /* 6059 * max lines to search for an open comment 6060 */ 6061 int ind_maxcomment = 70; 6062 6063 /* 6064 * handle braces for java code 6065 */ 6066 int ind_java = 0; 6067 6068 /* 6069 * handle blocked cases correctly 6070 */ 6071 int ind_keep_case_label = 0; 6072 6073 pos_T cur_curpos; 6074 int amount; 6075 int scope_amount; 6076 int cur_amount = MAXCOL; 6077 colnr_T col; 6078 char_u *theline; 6079 char_u *linecopy; 6080 pos_T *trypos; 6081 pos_T *tryposBrace = NULL; 6082 pos_T our_paren_pos; 6083 char_u *start; 6084 int start_brace; 6085 #define BRACE_IN_COL0 1 /* '{' is in comumn 0 */ 6086 #define BRACE_AT_START 2 /* '{' is at start of line */ 6087 #define BRACE_AT_END 3 /* '{' is at end of line */ 6088 linenr_T ourscope; 6089 char_u *l; 6090 char_u *look; 6091 char_u terminated; 6092 int lookfor; 6093 #define LOOKFOR_INITIAL 0 6094 #define LOOKFOR_IF 1 6095 #define LOOKFOR_DO 2 6096 #define LOOKFOR_CASE 3 6097 #define LOOKFOR_ANY 4 6098 #define LOOKFOR_TERM 5 6099 #define LOOKFOR_UNTERM 6 6100 #define LOOKFOR_SCOPEDECL 7 6101 #define LOOKFOR_NOBREAK 8 6102 #define LOOKFOR_CPP_BASECLASS 9 6103 #define LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT 10 6104 6105 int whilelevel; 6106 linenr_T lnum; 6107 char_u *options; 6108 int fraction = 0; /* init for GCC */ 6109 int divider; 6110 int n; 6111 int iscase; 6112 int lookfor_break; 6113 int cont_amount = 0; /* amount for continuation line */ 6114 6115 for (options = curbuf->b_p_cino; *options; ) 6116 { 6117 l = options++; 6118 if (*options == '-') 6119 ++options; 6120 n = getdigits(&options); 6121 divider = 0; 6122 if (*options == '.') /* ".5s" means a fraction */ 6123 { 6124 fraction = atol((char *)++options); 6125 while (VIM_ISDIGIT(*options)) 6126 { 6127 ++options; 6128 if (divider) 6129 divider *= 10; 6130 else 6131 divider = 10; 6132 } 6133 } 6134 if (*options == 's') /* "2s" means two times 'shiftwidth' */ 6135 { 6136 if (n == 0 && fraction == 0) 6137 n = curbuf->b_p_sw; /* just "s" is one 'shiftwidth' */ 6138 else 6139 { 6140 n *= curbuf->b_p_sw; 6141 if (divider) 6142 n += (curbuf->b_p_sw * fraction + divider / 2) / divider; 6143 } 6144 ++options; 6145 } 6146 if (l[1] == '-') 6147 n = -n; 6148 /* When adding an entry here, also update the default 'cinoptions' in 6149 * doc/indent.txt, and add explanation for it! */ 6150 switch (*l) 6151 { 6152 case '>': ind_level = n; break; 6153 case 'e': ind_open_imag = n; break; 6154 case 'n': ind_no_brace = n; break; 6155 case 'f': ind_first_open = n; break; 6156 case '{': ind_open_extra = n; break; 6157 case '}': ind_close_extra = n; break; 6158 case '^': ind_open_left_imag = n; break; 6159 case ':': ind_case = n; break; 6160 case '=': ind_case_code = n; break; 6161 case 'b': ind_case_break = n; break; 6162 case 'p': ind_param = n; break; 6163 case 't': ind_func_type = n; break; 6164 case '/': ind_comment = n; break; 6165 case 'c': ind_in_comment = n; break; 6166 case 'C': ind_in_comment2 = n; break; 6167 case 'i': ind_cpp_baseclass = n; break; 6168 case '+': ind_continuation = n; break; 6169 case '(': ind_unclosed = n; break; 6170 case 'u': ind_unclosed2 = n; break; 6171 case 'U': ind_unclosed_noignore = n; break; 6172 case 'W': ind_unclosed_wrapped = n; break; 6173 case 'w': ind_unclosed_whiteok = n; break; 6174 case 'm': ind_matching_paren = n; break; 6175 case 'M': ind_paren_prev = n; break; 6176 case ')': ind_maxparen = n; break; 6177 case '*': ind_maxcomment = n; break; 6178 case 'g': ind_scopedecl = n; break; 6179 case 'h': ind_scopedecl_code = n; break; 6180 case 'j': ind_java = n; break; 6181 case 'l': ind_keep_case_label = n; break; 6182 case '#': ind_hash_comment = n; break; 6183 } 6184 } 6185 6186 /* remember where the cursor was when we started */ 6187 cur_curpos = curwin->w_cursor; 6188 6189 /* Get a copy of the current contents of the line. 6190 * This is required, because only the most recent line obtained with 6191 * ml_get is valid! */ 6192 linecopy = vim_strsave(ml_get(cur_curpos.lnum)); 6193 if (linecopy == NULL) 6194 return 0; 6195 6196 /* 6197 * In insert mode and the cursor is on a ')' truncate the line at the 6198 * cursor position. We don't want to line up with the matching '(' when 6199 * inserting new stuff. 6200 * For unknown reasons the cursor might be past the end of the line, thus 6201 * check for that. 6202 */ 6203 if ((State & INSERT) 6204 && curwin->w_cursor.col < STRLEN(linecopy) 6205 && linecopy[curwin->w_cursor.col] == ')') 6206 linecopy[curwin->w_cursor.col] = NUL; 6207 6208 theline = skipwhite(linecopy); 6209 6210 /* move the cursor to the start of the line */ 6211 6212 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0; 6213 6214 /* 6215 * #defines and so on always go at the left when included in 'cinkeys'. 6216 */ 6217 if (*theline == '#' && (*linecopy == '#' || in_cinkeys('#', ' ', TRUE))) 6218 { 6219 amount = 0; 6220 } 6221 6222 /* 6223 * Is it a non-case label? Then that goes at the left margin too. 6224 */ 6225 else if (cin_islabel(ind_maxcomment)) /* XXX */ 6226 { 6227 amount = 0; 6228 } 6229 6230 /* 6231 * If we're inside a "//" comment and there is a "//" comment in a 6232 * previous line, lineup with that one. 6233 */ 6234 else if (cin_islinecomment(theline) 6235 && (trypos = find_line_comment()) != NULL) /* XXX */ 6236 { 6237 /* find how indented the line beginning the comment is */ 6238 getvcol(curwin, trypos, &col, NULL, NULL); 6239 amount = col; 6240 } 6241 6242 /* 6243 * If we're inside a comment and not looking at the start of the 6244 * comment, try using the 'comments' option. 6245 */ 6246 else if (!cin_iscomment(theline) 6247 && (trypos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL) /* XXX */ 6248 { 6249 int lead_start_len = 2; 6250 int lead_middle_len = 1; 6251 char_u lead_start[COM_MAX_LEN]; /* start-comment string */ 6252 char_u lead_middle[COM_MAX_LEN]; /* middle-comment string */ 6253 char_u lead_end[COM_MAX_LEN]; /* end-comment string */ 6254 char_u *p; 6255 int start_align = 0; 6256 int start_off = 0; 6257 int done = FALSE; 6258 6259 /* find how indented the line beginning the comment is */ 6260 getvcol(curwin, trypos, &col, NULL, NULL); 6261 amount = col; 6262 6263 p = curbuf->b_p_com; 6264 while (*p != NUL) 6265 { 6266 int align = 0; 6267 int off = 0; 6268 int what = 0; 6269 6270 while (*p != NUL && *p != ':') 6271 { 6272 if (*p == COM_START || *p == COM_END || *p == COM_MIDDLE) 6273 what = *p++; 6274 else if (*p == COM_LEFT || *p == COM_RIGHT) 6275 align = *p++; 6276 else if (VIM_ISDIGIT(*p) || *p == '-') 6277 off = getdigits(&p); 6278 else 6279 ++p; 6280 } 6281 6282 if (*p == ':') 6283 ++p; 6284 (void)copy_option_part(&p, lead_end, COM_MAX_LEN, ","); 6285 if (what == COM_START) 6286 { 6287 STRCPY(lead_start, lead_end); 6288 lead_start_len = (int)STRLEN(lead_start); 6289 start_off = off; 6290 start_align = align; 6291 } 6292 else if (what == COM_MIDDLE) 6293 { 6294 STRCPY(lead_middle, lead_end); 6295 lead_middle_len = (int)STRLEN(lead_middle); 6296 } 6297 else if (what == COM_END) 6298 { 6299 /* If our line starts with the middle comment string, line it 6300 * up with the comment opener per the 'comments' option. */ 6301 if (STRNCMP(theline, lead_middle, lead_middle_len) == 0 6302 && STRNCMP(theline, lead_end, STRLEN(lead_end)) != 0) 6303 { 6304 done = TRUE; 6305 if (curwin->w_cursor.lnum > 1) 6306 { 6307 /* If the start comment string matches in the previous 6308 * line, use the indent of that line pluss offset. If 6309 * the middle comment string matches in the previous 6310 * line, use the indent of that line. XXX */ 6311 look = skipwhite(ml_get(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1)); 6312 if (STRNCMP(look, lead_start, lead_start_len) == 0) 6313 amount = get_indent_lnum(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1); 6314 else if (STRNCMP(look, lead_middle, 6315 lead_middle_len) == 0) 6316 { 6317 amount = get_indent_lnum(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1); 6318 break; 6319 } 6320 /* If the start comment string doesn't match with the 6321 * start of the comment, skip this entry. XXX */ 6322 else if (STRNCMP(ml_get(trypos->lnum) + trypos->col, 6323 lead_start, lead_start_len) != 0) 6324 continue; 6325 } 6326 if (start_off != 0) 6327 amount += start_off; 6328 else if (start_align == COM_RIGHT) 6329 amount += vim_strsize(lead_start) 6330 - vim_strsize(lead_middle); 6331 break; 6332 } 6333 6334 /* If our line starts with the end comment string, line it up 6335 * with the middle comment */ 6336 if (STRNCMP(theline, lead_middle, lead_middle_len) != 0 6337 && STRNCMP(theline, lead_end, STRLEN(lead_end)) == 0) 6338 { 6339 amount = get_indent_lnum(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1); 6340 /* XXX */ 6341 if (off != 0) 6342 amount += off; 6343 else if (align == COM_RIGHT) 6344 amount += vim_strsize(lead_start) 6345 - vim_strsize(lead_middle); 6346 done = TRUE; 6347 break; 6348 } 6349 } 6350 } 6351 6352 /* If our line starts with an asterisk, line up with the 6353 * asterisk in the comment opener; otherwise, line up 6354 * with the first character of the comment text. 6355 */ 6356 if (done) 6357 ; 6358 else if (theline[0] == '*') 6359 amount += 1; 6360 else 6361 { 6362 /* 6363 * If we are more than one line away from the comment opener, take 6364 * the indent of the previous non-empty line. If 'cino' has "CO" 6365 * and we are just below the comment opener and there are any 6366 * white characters after it line up with the text after it; 6367 * otherwise, add the amount specified by "c" in 'cino' 6368 */ 6369 amount = -1; 6370 for (lnum = cur_curpos.lnum - 1; lnum > trypos->lnum; --lnum) 6371 { 6372 if (linewhite(lnum)) /* skip blank lines */ 6373 continue; 6374 amount = get_indent_lnum(lnum); /* XXX */ 6375 break; 6376 } 6377 if (amount == -1) /* use the comment opener */ 6378 { 6379 if (!ind_in_comment2) 6380 { 6381 start = ml_get(trypos->lnum); 6382 look = start + trypos->col + 2; /* skip / and * */ 6383 if (*look != NUL) /* if something after it */ 6384 trypos->col = (colnr_T)(skipwhite(look) - start); 6385 } 6386 getvcol(curwin, trypos, &col, NULL, NULL); 6387 amount = col; 6388 if (ind_in_comment2 || *look == NUL) 6389 amount += ind_in_comment; 6390 } 6391 } 6392 } 6393 6394 /* 6395 * Are we inside parentheses or braces? 6396 */ /* XXX */ 6397 else if (((trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen, ind_maxcomment)) != NULL 6398 && ind_java == 0) 6399 || (tryposBrace = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL 6400 || trypos != NULL) 6401 { 6402 if (trypos != NULL && tryposBrace != NULL) 6403 { 6404 /* Both an unmatched '(' and '{' is found. Use the one which is 6405 * closer to the current cursor position, set the other to NULL. */ 6406 if (trypos->lnum != tryposBrace->lnum 6407 ? trypos->lnum < tryposBrace->lnum 6408 : trypos->col < tryposBrace->col) 6409 trypos = NULL; 6410 else 6411 tryposBrace = NULL; 6412 } 6413 6414 if (trypos != NULL) 6415 { 6416 /* 6417 * If the matching paren is more than one line away, use the indent of 6418 * a previous non-empty line that matches the same paren. 6419 */ 6420 if (theline[0] == ')' && ind_paren_prev) 6421 { 6422 /* Line up with the start of the matching paren line. */ 6423 amount = get_indent_lnum(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1); /* XXX */ 6424 } 6425 else 6426 { 6427 amount = -1; 6428 our_paren_pos = *trypos; 6429 for (lnum = cur_curpos.lnum - 1; lnum > our_paren_pos.lnum; --lnum) 6430 { 6431 l = skipwhite(ml_get(lnum)); 6432 if (cin_nocode(l)) /* skip comment lines */ 6433 continue; 6434 if (cin_ispreproc_cont(&l, &lnum)) 6435 continue; /* ignore #define, #if, etc. */ 6436 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = lnum; 6437 6438 /* Skip a comment. XXX */ 6439 if ((trypos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL) 6440 { 6441 lnum = trypos->lnum + 1; 6442 continue; 6443 } 6444 6445 /* XXX */ 6446 if ((trypos = find_match_paren( 6447 corr_ind_maxparen(ind_maxparen, &cur_curpos), 6448 ind_maxcomment)) != NULL 6449 && trypos->lnum == our_paren_pos.lnum 6450 && trypos->col == our_paren_pos.col) 6451 { 6452 amount = get_indent_lnum(lnum); /* XXX */ 6453 6454 if (theline[0] == ')') 6455 { 6456 if (our_paren_pos.lnum != lnum 6457 && cur_amount > amount) 6458 cur_amount = amount; 6459 amount = -1; 6460 } 6461 break; 6462 } 6463 } 6464 } 6465 6466 /* 6467 * Line up with line where the matching paren is. XXX 6468 * If the line starts with a '(' or the indent for unclosed 6469 * parentheses is zero, line up with the unclosed parentheses. 6470 */ 6471 if (amount == -1) 6472 { 6473 int ignore_paren_col = 0; 6474 6475 amount = skip_label(our_paren_pos.lnum, &look, ind_maxcomment); 6476 look = skipwhite(look); 6477 if (*look == '(') 6478 { 6479 linenr_T save_lnum = curwin->w_cursor.lnum; 6480 char_u *line; 6481 int look_col; 6482 6483 /* Ignore a '(' in front of the line that has a match before 6484 * our matching '('. */ 6485 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = our_paren_pos.lnum; 6486 line = ml_get_curline(); 6487 look_col = (int)(look - line); 6488 curwin->w_cursor.col = look_col + 1; 6489 if ((trypos = findmatchlimit(NULL, ')', 0, ind_maxparen)) 6490 != NULL 6491 && trypos->lnum == our_paren_pos.lnum 6492 && trypos->col < our_paren_pos.col) 6493 ignore_paren_col = trypos->col + 1; 6494 6495 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = save_lnum; 6496 look = ml_get(our_paren_pos.lnum) + look_col; 6497 } 6498 if (theline[0] == ')' || ind_unclosed == 0 6499 || (!ind_unclosed_noignore && *look == '(' 6500 && ignore_paren_col == 0)) 6501 { 6502 /* 6503 * If we're looking at a close paren, line up right there; 6504 * otherwise, line up with the next (non-white) character. 6505 * When ind_unclosed_wrapped is set and the matching paren is 6506 * the last nonwhite character of the line, use either the 6507 * indent of the current line or the indentation of the next 6508 * outer paren and add ind_unclosed_wrapped (for very long 6509 * lines). 6510 */ 6511 if (theline[0] != ')') 6512 { 6513 cur_amount = MAXCOL; 6514 l = ml_get(our_paren_pos.lnum); 6515 if (ind_unclosed_wrapped 6516 && cin_ends_in(l, (char_u *)"(", NULL)) 6517 { 6518 /* look for opening unmatched paren, indent one level 6519 * for each additional level */ 6520 n = 1; 6521 for (col = 0; col < our_paren_pos.col; ++col) 6522 { 6523 switch (l[col]) 6524 { 6525 case '(': 6526 case '{': ++n; 6527 break; 6528 6529 case ')': 6530 case '}': if (n > 1) 6531 --n; 6532 break; 6533 } 6534 } 6535 6536 our_paren_pos.col = 0; 6537 amount += n * ind_unclosed_wrapped; 6538 } 6539 else if (ind_unclosed_whiteok) 6540 our_paren_pos.col++; 6541 else 6542 { 6543 col = our_paren_pos.col + 1; 6544 while (vim_iswhite(l[col])) 6545 col++; 6546 if (l[col] != NUL) /* In case of trailing space */ 6547 our_paren_pos.col = col; 6548 else 6549 our_paren_pos.col++; 6550 } 6551 } 6552 6553 /* 6554 * Find how indented the paren is, or the character after it 6555 * if we did the above "if". 6556 */ 6557 if (our_paren_pos.col > 0) 6558 { 6559 getvcol(curwin, &our_paren_pos, &col, NULL, NULL); 6560 if (cur_amount > (int)col) 6561 cur_amount = col; 6562 } 6563 } 6564 6565 if (theline[0] == ')' && ind_matching_paren) 6566 { 6567 /* Line up with the start of the matching paren line. */ 6568 } 6569 else if (ind_unclosed == 0 || (!ind_unclosed_noignore 6570 && *look == '(' && ignore_paren_col == 0)) 6571 { 6572 if (cur_amount != MAXCOL) 6573 amount = cur_amount; 6574 } 6575 else 6576 { 6577 /* Add ind_unclosed2 for each '(' before our matching one, but 6578 * ignore (void) before the line (ignore_paren_col). */ 6579 col = our_paren_pos.col; 6580 while ((int)our_paren_pos.col > ignore_paren_col) 6581 { 6582 --our_paren_pos.col; 6583 switch (*ml_get_pos(&our_paren_pos)) 6584 { 6585 case '(': amount += ind_unclosed2; 6586 col = our_paren_pos.col; 6587 break; 6588 case ')': amount -= ind_unclosed2; 6589 col = MAXCOL; 6590 break; 6591 } 6592 } 6593 6594 /* Use ind_unclosed once, when the first '(' is not inside 6595 * braces */ 6596 if (col == MAXCOL) 6597 amount += ind_unclosed; 6598 else 6599 { 6600 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = our_paren_pos.lnum; 6601 curwin->w_cursor.col = col; 6602 if ((trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen, 6603 ind_maxcomment)) != NULL) 6604 amount += ind_unclosed2; 6605 else 6606 amount += ind_unclosed; 6607 } 6608 /* 6609 * For a line starting with ')' use the minimum of the two 6610 * positions, to avoid giving it more indent than the previous 6611 * lines: 6612 * func_long_name( if (x 6613 * arg && yy 6614 * ) ^ not here ) ^ not here 6615 */ 6616 if (cur_amount < amount) 6617 amount = cur_amount; 6618 } 6619 } 6620 6621 /* add extra indent for a comment */ 6622 if (cin_iscomment(theline)) 6623 amount += ind_comment; 6624 } 6625 6626 /* 6627 * Are we at least inside braces, then? 6628 */ 6629 else 6630 { 6631 trypos = tryposBrace; 6632 6633 ourscope = trypos->lnum; 6634 start = ml_get(ourscope); 6635 6636 /* 6637 * Now figure out how indented the line is in general. 6638 * If the brace was at the start of the line, we use that; 6639 * otherwise, check out the indentation of the line as 6640 * a whole and then add the "imaginary indent" to that. 6641 */ 6642 look = skipwhite(start); 6643 if (*look == '{') 6644 { 6645 getvcol(curwin, trypos, &col, NULL, NULL); 6646 amount = col; 6647 if (*start == '{') 6648 start_brace = BRACE_IN_COL0; 6649 else 6650 start_brace = BRACE_AT_START; 6651 } 6652 else 6653 { 6654 /* 6655 * that opening brace might have been on a continuation 6656 * line. if so, find the start of the line. 6657 */ 6658 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = ourscope; 6659 6660 /* 6661 * position the cursor over the rightmost paren, so that 6662 * matching it will take us back to the start of the line. 6663 */ 6664 lnum = ourscope; 6665 if (find_last_paren(start, '(', ')') 6666 && (trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen, 6667 ind_maxcomment)) != NULL) 6668 lnum = trypos->lnum; 6669 6670 /* 6671 * It could have been something like 6672 * case 1: if (asdf && 6673 * ldfd) { 6674 * } 6675 */ 6676 if (ind_keep_case_label && cin_iscase(skipwhite(ml_get_curline()))) 6677 amount = get_indent(); 6678 else 6679 amount = skip_label(lnum, &l, ind_maxcomment); 6680 6681 start_brace = BRACE_AT_END; 6682 } 6683 6684 /* 6685 * if we're looking at a closing brace, that's where 6686 * we want to be. otherwise, add the amount of room 6687 * that an indent is supposed to be. 6688 */ 6689 if (theline[0] == '}') 6690 { 6691 /* 6692 * they may want closing braces to line up with something 6693 * other than the open brace. indulge them, if so. 6694 */ 6695 amount += ind_close_extra; 6696 } 6697 else 6698 { 6699 /* 6700 * If we're looking at an "else", try to find an "if" 6701 * to match it with. 6702 * If we're looking at a "while", try to find a "do" 6703 * to match it with. 6704 */ 6705 lookfor = LOOKFOR_INITIAL; 6706 if (cin_iselse(theline)) 6707 lookfor = LOOKFOR_IF; 6708 else if (cin_iswhileofdo(theline, cur_curpos.lnum, ind_maxparen)) 6709 /* XXX */ 6710 lookfor = LOOKFOR_DO; 6711 if (lookfor != LOOKFOR_INITIAL) 6712 { 6713 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = cur_curpos.lnum; 6714 if (find_match(lookfor, ourscope, ind_maxparen, 6715 ind_maxcomment) == OK) 6716 { 6717 amount = get_indent(); /* XXX */ 6718 goto theend; 6719 } 6720 } 6721 6722 /* 6723 * We get here if we are not on an "while-of-do" or "else" (or 6724 * failed to find a matching "if"). 6725 * Search backwards for something to line up with. 6726 * First set amount for when we don't find anything. 6727 */ 6728 6729 /* 6730 * if the '{' is _really_ at the left margin, use the imaginary 6731 * location of a left-margin brace. Otherwise, correct the 6732 * location for ind_open_extra. 6733 */ 6734 6735 if (start_brace == BRACE_IN_COL0) /* '{' is in column 0 */ 6736 { 6737 amount = ind_open_left_imag; 6738 } 6739 else 6740 { 6741 if (start_brace == BRACE_AT_END) /* '{' is at end of line */ 6742 amount += ind_open_imag; 6743 else 6744 { 6745 /* Compensate for adding ind_open_extra later. */ 6746 amount -= ind_open_extra; 6747 if (amount < 0) 6748 amount = 0; 6749 } 6750 } 6751 6752 lookfor_break = FALSE; 6753 6754 if (cin_iscase(theline)) /* it's a switch() label */ 6755 { 6756 lookfor = LOOKFOR_CASE; /* find a previous switch() label */ 6757 amount += ind_case; 6758 } 6759 else if (cin_isscopedecl(theline)) /* private:, ... */ 6760 { 6761 lookfor = LOOKFOR_SCOPEDECL; /* class decl is this block */ 6762 amount += ind_scopedecl; 6763 } 6764 else 6765 { 6766 if (ind_case_break && cin_isbreak(theline)) /* break; ... */ 6767 lookfor_break = TRUE; 6768 6769 lookfor = LOOKFOR_INITIAL; 6770 amount += ind_level; /* ind_level from start of block */ 6771 } 6772 scope_amount = amount; 6773 whilelevel = 0; 6774 6775 /* 6776 * Search backwards. If we find something we recognize, line up 6777 * with that. 6778 * 6779 * if we're looking at an open brace, indent 6780 * the usual amount relative to the conditional 6781 * that opens the block. 6782 */ 6783 curwin->w_cursor = cur_curpos; 6784 for (;;) 6785 { 6786 curwin->w_cursor.lnum--; 6787 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0; 6788 6789 /* 6790 * If we went all the way back to the start of our scope, line 6791 * up with it. 6792 */ 6793 if (curwin->w_cursor.lnum <= ourscope) 6794 { 6795 /* we reached end of scope: 6796 * if looking for a enum or structure initialization 6797 * go further back: 6798 * if it is an initializer (enum xxx or xxx =), then 6799 * don't add ind_continuation, otherwise it is a variable 6800 * declaration: 6801 * int x, 6802 * here; <-- add ind_continuation 6803 */ 6804 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT) 6805 { 6806 if (curwin->w_cursor.lnum == 0 6807 || curwin->w_cursor.lnum 6808 < ourscope - ind_maxparen) 6809 { 6810 /* nothing found (abuse ind_maxparen as limit) 6811 * assume terminated line (i.e. a variable 6812 * initialization) */ 6813 if (cont_amount > 0) 6814 amount = cont_amount; 6815 else 6816 amount += ind_continuation; 6817 break; 6818 } 6819 6820 l = ml_get_curline(); 6821 6822 /* 6823 * If we're in a comment now, skip to the start of the 6824 * comment. 6825 */ 6826 trypos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment); 6827 if (trypos != NULL) 6828 { 6829 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum + 1; 6830 continue; 6831 } 6832 6833 /* 6834 * Skip preprocessor directives and blank lines. 6835 */ 6836 if (cin_ispreproc_cont(&l, &curwin->w_cursor.lnum)) 6837 continue; 6838 6839 if (cin_nocode(l)) 6840 continue; 6841 6842 terminated = cin_isterminated(l, FALSE, TRUE); 6843 6844 /* 6845 * If we are at top level and the line looks like a 6846 * function declaration, we are done 6847 * (it's a variable declaration). 6848 */ 6849 if (start_brace != BRACE_IN_COL0 6850 || !cin_isfuncdecl(&l, curwin->w_cursor.lnum)) 6851 { 6852 /* if the line is terminated with another ',' 6853 * it is a continued variable initialization. 6854 * don't add extra indent. 6855 * TODO: does not work, if a function 6856 * declaration is split over multiple lines: 6857 * cin_isfuncdecl returns FALSE then. 6858 */ 6859 if (terminated == ',') 6860 break; 6861 6862 /* if it es a enum declaration or an assignment, 6863 * we are done. 6864 */ 6865 if (terminated != ';' && cin_isinit()) 6866 break; 6867 6868 /* nothing useful found */ 6869 if (terminated == 0 || terminated == '{') 6870 continue; 6871 } 6872 6873 if (terminated != ';') 6874 { 6875 /* Skip parens and braces. Position the cursor 6876 * over the rightmost paren, so that matching it 6877 * will take us back to the start of the line. 6878 */ /* XXX */ 6879 trypos = NULL; 6880 if (find_last_paren(l, '(', ')')) 6881 trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen, 6882 ind_maxcomment); 6883 6884 if (trypos == NULL && find_last_paren(l, '{', '}')) 6885 trypos = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment); 6886 6887 if (trypos != NULL) 6888 { 6889 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum + 1; 6890 continue; 6891 } 6892 } 6893 6894 /* it's a variable declaration, add indentation 6895 * like in 6896 * int a, 6897 * b; 6898 */ 6899 if (cont_amount > 0) 6900 amount = cont_amount; 6901 else 6902 amount += ind_continuation; 6903 } 6904 else if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM) 6905 { 6906 if (cont_amount > 0) 6907 amount = cont_amount; 6908 else 6909 amount += ind_continuation; 6910 } 6911 else if (lookfor != LOOKFOR_TERM 6912 && lookfor != LOOKFOR_CPP_BASECLASS) 6913 { 6914 amount = scope_amount; 6915 if (theline[0] == '{') 6916 amount += ind_open_extra; 6917 } 6918 break; 6919 } 6920 6921 /* 6922 * If we're in a comment now, skip to the start of the comment. 6923 */ /* XXX */ 6924 if ((trypos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL) 6925 { 6926 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum + 1; 6927 continue; 6928 } 6929 6930 l = ml_get_curline(); 6931 6932 /* 6933 * If this is a switch() label, may line up relative to that. 6934 * If this is a C++ scope declaration, do the same. 6935 */ 6936 iscase = cin_iscase(l); 6937 if (iscase || cin_isscopedecl(l)) 6938 { 6939 /* we are only looking for cpp base class 6940 * declaration/initialization any longer */ 6941 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_CPP_BASECLASS) 6942 break; 6943 6944 /* When looking for a "do" we are not interested in 6945 * labels. */ 6946 if (whilelevel > 0) 6947 continue; 6948 6949 /* 6950 * case xx: 6951 * c = 99 + <- this indent plus continuation 6952 *-> here; 6953 */ 6954 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM 6955 || lookfor == LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT) 6956 { 6957 if (cont_amount > 0) 6958 amount = cont_amount; 6959 else 6960 amount += ind_continuation; 6961 break; 6962 } 6963 6964 /* 6965 * case xx: <- line up with this case 6966 * x = 333; 6967 * case yy: 6968 */ 6969 if ( (iscase && lookfor == LOOKFOR_CASE) 6970 || (iscase && lookfor_break) 6971 || (!iscase && lookfor == LOOKFOR_SCOPEDECL)) 6972 { 6973 /* 6974 * Check that this case label is not for another 6975 * switch() 6976 */ /* XXX */ 6977 if ((trypos = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment)) == 6978 NULL || trypos->lnum == ourscope) 6979 { 6980 amount = get_indent(); /* XXX */ 6981 break; 6982 } 6983 continue; 6984 } 6985 6986 n = get_indent_nolabel(curwin->w_cursor.lnum); /* XXX */ 6987 6988 /* 6989 * case xx: if (cond) <- line up with this if 6990 * y = y + 1; 6991 * -> s = 99; 6992 * 6993 * case xx: 6994 * if (cond) <- line up with this line 6995 * y = y + 1; 6996 * -> s = 99; 6997 */ 6998 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_TERM) 6999 { 7000 if (n) 7001 amount = n; 7002 7003 if (!lookfor_break) 7004 break; 7005 } 7006 7007 /* 7008 * case xx: x = x + 1; <- line up with this x 7009 * -> y = y + 1; 7010 * 7011 * case xx: if (cond) <- line up with this if 7012 * -> y = y + 1; 7013 */ 7014 if (n) 7015 { 7016 amount = n; 7017 l = after_label(ml_get_curline()); 7018 if (l != NULL && cin_is_cinword(l)) 7019 { 7020 if (theline[0] == '{') 7021 amount += ind_open_extra; 7022 else 7023 amount += ind_level + ind_no_brace; 7024 } 7025 break; 7026 } 7027 7028 /* 7029 * Try to get the indent of a statement before the switch 7030 * label. If nothing is found, line up relative to the 7031 * switch label. 7032 * break; <- may line up with this line 7033 * case xx: 7034 * -> y = 1; 7035 */ 7036 scope_amount = get_indent() + (iscase /* XXX */ 7037 ? ind_case_code : ind_scopedecl_code); 7038 lookfor = ind_case_break ? LOOKFOR_NOBREAK : LOOKFOR_ANY; 7039 continue; 7040 } 7041 7042 /* 7043 * Looking for a switch() label or C++ scope declaration, 7044 * ignore other lines, skip {}-blocks. 7045 */ 7046 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_CASE || lookfor == LOOKFOR_SCOPEDECL) 7047 { 7048 if (find_last_paren(l, '{', '}') && (trypos = 7049 find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL) 7050 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum + 1; 7051 continue; 7052 } 7053 7054 /* 7055 * Ignore jump labels with nothing after them. 7056 */ 7057 if (cin_islabel(ind_maxcomment)) 7058 { 7059 l = after_label(ml_get_curline()); 7060 if (l == NULL || cin_nocode(l)) 7061 continue; 7062 } 7063 7064 /* 7065 * Ignore #defines, #if, etc. 7066 * Ignore comment and empty lines. 7067 * (need to get the line again, cin_islabel() may have 7068 * unlocked it) 7069 */ 7070 l = ml_get_curline(); 7071 if (cin_ispreproc_cont(&l, &curwin->w_cursor.lnum) 7072 || cin_nocode(l)) 7073 continue; 7074 7075 /* 7076 * Are we at the start of a cpp base class declaration or 7077 * constructor initialization? 7078 */ /* XXX */ 7079 n = FALSE; 7080 if (lookfor != LOOKFOR_TERM && ind_cpp_baseclass > 0) 7081 { 7082 n = cin_is_cpp_baseclass(l, &col); 7083 l = ml_get_curline(); 7084 } 7085 if (n) 7086 { 7087 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM) 7088 { 7089 if (cont_amount > 0) 7090 amount = cont_amount; 7091 else 7092 amount += ind_continuation; 7093 } 7094 else if (theline[0] == '{') 7095 { 7096 /* Need to find start of the declaration. */ 7097 lookfor = LOOKFOR_UNTERM; 7098 ind_continuation = 0; 7099 continue; 7100 } 7101 else 7102 /* XXX */ 7103 amount = get_baseclass_amount(col, ind_maxparen, 7104 ind_maxcomment, ind_cpp_baseclass); 7105 break; 7106 } 7107 else if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_CPP_BASECLASS) 7108 { 7109 /* only look, whether there is a cpp base class 7110 * declaration or initialization before the opening brace. 7111 */ 7112 if (cin_isterminated(l, TRUE, FALSE)) 7113 break; 7114 else 7115 continue; 7116 } 7117 7118 /* 7119 * What happens next depends on the line being terminated. 7120 * If terminated with a ',' only consider it terminating if 7121 * there is anoter unterminated statement behind, eg: 7122 * 123, 7123 * sizeof 7124 * here 7125 * Otherwise check whether it is a enumeration or structure 7126 * initialisation (not indented) or a variable declaration 7127 * (indented). 7128 */ 7129 terminated = cin_isterminated(l, FALSE, TRUE); 7130 7131 if (terminated == 0 || (lookfor != LOOKFOR_UNTERM 7132 && terminated == ',')) 7133 { 7134 /* 7135 * if we're in the middle of a paren thing, 7136 * go back to the line that starts it so 7137 * we can get the right prevailing indent 7138 * if ( foo && 7139 * bar ) 7140 */ 7141 /* 7142 * position the cursor over the rightmost paren, so that 7143 * matching it will take us back to the start of the line. 7144 */ 7145 (void)find_last_paren(l, '(', ')'); 7146 trypos = find_match_paren( 7147 corr_ind_maxparen(ind_maxparen, &cur_curpos), 7148 ind_maxcomment); 7149 7150 /* 7151 * If we are looking for ',', we also look for matching 7152 * braces. 7153 */ 7154 if (trypos == NULL && terminated == ',' 7155 && find_last_paren(l, '{', '}')) 7156 trypos = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment); 7157 7158 if (trypos != NULL) 7159 { 7160 /* 7161 * Check if we are on a case label now. This is 7162 * handled above. 7163 * case xx: if ( asdf && 7164 * asdf) 7165 */ 7166 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum; 7167 l = ml_get_curline(); 7168 if (cin_iscase(l) || cin_isscopedecl(l)) 7169 { 7170 ++curwin->w_cursor.lnum; 7171 continue; 7172 } 7173 } 7174 7175 /* 7176 * Skip over continuation lines to find the one to get the 7177 * indent from 7178 * char *usethis = "bla\ 7179 * bla", 7180 * here; 7181 */ 7182 if (terminated == ',') 7183 { 7184 while (curwin->w_cursor.lnum > 1) 7185 { 7186 l = ml_get(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1); 7187 if (*l == NUL || l[STRLEN(l) - 1] != '\\') 7188 break; 7189 --curwin->w_cursor.lnum; 7190 } 7191 } 7192 7193 /* 7194 * Get indent and pointer to text for current line, 7195 * ignoring any jump label. XXX 7196 */ 7197 cur_amount = skip_label(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, 7198 &l, ind_maxcomment); 7199 7200 /* 7201 * If this is just above the line we are indenting, and it 7202 * starts with a '{', line it up with this line. 7203 * while (not) 7204 * -> { 7205 * } 7206 */ 7207 if (terminated != ',' && lookfor != LOOKFOR_TERM 7208 && theline[0] == '{') 7209 { 7210 amount = cur_amount; 7211 /* 7212 * Only add ind_open_extra when the current line 7213 * doesn't start with a '{', which must have a match 7214 * in the same line (scope is the same). Probably: 7215 * { 1, 2 }, 7216 * -> { 3, 4 } 7217 */ 7218 if (*skipwhite(l) != '{') 7219 amount += ind_open_extra; 7220 7221 if (ind_cpp_baseclass) 7222 { 7223 /* have to look back, whether it is a cpp base 7224 * class declaration or initialization */ 7225 lookfor = LOOKFOR_CPP_BASECLASS; 7226 continue; 7227 } 7228 break; 7229 } 7230 7231 /* 7232 * Check if we are after an "if", "while", etc. 7233 * Also allow " } else". 7234 */ 7235 if (cin_is_cinword(l) || cin_iselse(skipwhite(l))) 7236 { 7237 /* 7238 * Found an unterminated line after an if (), line up 7239 * with the last one. 7240 * if (cond) 7241 * 100 + 7242 * -> here; 7243 */ 7244 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM 7245 || lookfor == LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT) 7246 { 7247 if (cont_amount > 0) 7248 amount = cont_amount; 7249 else 7250 amount += ind_continuation; 7251 break; 7252 } 7253 7254 /* 7255 * If this is just above the line we are indenting, we 7256 * are finished. 7257 * while (not) 7258 * -> here; 7259 * Otherwise this indent can be used when the line 7260 * before this is terminated. 7261 * yyy; 7262 * if (stat) 7263 * while (not) 7264 * xxx; 7265 * -> here; 7266 */ 7267 amount = cur_amount; 7268 if (theline[0] == '{') 7269 amount += ind_open_extra; 7270 if (lookfor != LOOKFOR_TERM) 7271 { 7272 amount += ind_level + ind_no_brace; 7273 break; 7274 } 7275 7276 /* 7277 * Special trick: when expecting the while () after a 7278 * do, line up with the while() 7279 * do 7280 * x = 1; 7281 * -> here 7282 */ 7283 l = skipwhite(ml_get_curline()); 7284 if (cin_isdo(l)) 7285 { 7286 if (whilelevel == 0) 7287 break; 7288 --whilelevel; 7289 } 7290 7291 /* 7292 * When searching for a terminated line, don't use the 7293 * one between the "if" and the "else". 7294 * Need to use the scope of this "else". XXX 7295 * If whilelevel != 0 continue looking for a "do {". 7296 */ 7297 if (cin_iselse(l) 7298 && whilelevel == 0 7299 && ((trypos = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment)) 7300 == NULL 7301 || find_match(LOOKFOR_IF, trypos->lnum, 7302 ind_maxparen, ind_maxcomment) == FAIL)) 7303 break; 7304 } 7305 7306 /* 7307 * If we're below an unterminated line that is not an 7308 * "if" or something, we may line up with this line or 7309 * add someting for a continuation line, depending on 7310 * the line before this one. 7311 */ 7312 else 7313 { 7314 /* 7315 * Found two unterminated lines on a row, line up with 7316 * the last one. 7317 * c = 99 + 7318 * 100 + 7319 * -> here; 7320 */ 7321 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM) 7322 { 7323 /* When line ends in a comma add extra indent */ 7324 if (terminated == ',') 7325 amount += ind_continuation; 7326 break; 7327 } 7328 7329 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT) 7330 { 7331 /* Found two lines ending in ',', lineup with the 7332 * lowest one, but check for cpp base class 7333 * declaration/initialization, if it is an 7334 * opening brace or we are looking just for 7335 * enumerations/initializations. */ 7336 if (terminated == ',') 7337 { 7338 if (ind_cpp_baseclass == 0) 7339 break; 7340 7341 lookfor = LOOKFOR_CPP_BASECLASS; 7342 continue; 7343 } 7344 7345 /* Ignore unterminated lines in between, but 7346 * reduce indent. */ 7347 if (amount > cur_amount) 7348 amount = cur_amount; 7349 } 7350 else 7351 { 7352 /* 7353 * Found first unterminated line on a row, may 7354 * line up with this line, remember its indent 7355 * 100 + 7356 * -> here; 7357 */ 7358 amount = cur_amount; 7359 7360 /* 7361 * If previous line ends in ',', check whether we 7362 * are in an initialization or enum 7363 * struct xxx = 7364 * { 7365 * sizeof a, 7366 * 124 }; 7367 * or a normal possible continuation line. 7368 * but only, of no other statement has been found 7369 * yet. 7370 */ 7371 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_INITIAL && terminated == ',') 7372 { 7373 lookfor = LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT; 7374 cont_amount = cin_first_id_amount(); 7375 } 7376 else 7377 { 7378 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_INITIAL 7379 && *l != NUL 7380 && l[STRLEN(l) - 1] == '\\') 7381 /* XXX */ 7382 cont_amount = cin_get_equal_amount( 7383 curwin->w_cursor.lnum); 7384 if (lookfor != LOOKFOR_TERM) 7385 lookfor = LOOKFOR_UNTERM; 7386 } 7387 } 7388 } 7389 } 7390 7391 /* 7392 * Check if we are after a while (cond); 7393 * If so: Ignore until the matching "do". 7394 */ 7395 /* XXX */ 7396 else if (cin_iswhileofdo_end(terminated, ind_maxparen, 7397 ind_maxcomment)) 7398 { 7399 /* 7400 * Found an unterminated line after a while ();, line up 7401 * with the last one. 7402 * while (cond); 7403 * 100 + <- line up with this one 7404 * -> here; 7405 */ 7406 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM 7407 || lookfor == LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT) 7408 { 7409 if (cont_amount > 0) 7410 amount = cont_amount; 7411 else 7412 amount += ind_continuation; 7413 break; 7414 } 7415 7416 if (whilelevel == 0) 7417 { 7418 lookfor = LOOKFOR_TERM; 7419 amount = get_indent(); /* XXX */ 7420 if (theline[0] == '{') 7421 amount += ind_open_extra; 7422 } 7423 ++whilelevel; 7424 } 7425 7426 /* 7427 * We are after a "normal" statement. 7428 * If we had another statement we can stop now and use the 7429 * indent of that other statement. 7430 * Otherwise the indent of the current statement may be used, 7431 * search backwards for the next "normal" statement. 7432 */ 7433 else 7434 { 7435 /* 7436 * Skip single break line, if before a switch label. It 7437 * may be lined up with the case label. 7438 */ 7439 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_NOBREAK 7440 && cin_isbreak(skipwhite(ml_get_curline()))) 7441 { 7442 lookfor = LOOKFOR_ANY; 7443 continue; 7444 } 7445 7446 /* 7447 * Handle "do {" line. 7448 */ 7449 if (whilelevel > 0) 7450 { 7451 l = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline()); 7452 if (cin_isdo(l)) 7453 { 7454 amount = get_indent(); /* XXX */ 7455 --whilelevel; 7456 continue; 7457 } 7458 } 7459 7460 /* 7461 * Found a terminated line above an unterminated line. Add 7462 * the amount for a continuation line. 7463 * x = 1; 7464 * y = foo + 7465 * -> here; 7466 * or 7467 * int x = 1; 7468 * int foo, 7469 * -> here; 7470 */ 7471 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM 7472 || lookfor == LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT) 7473 { 7474 if (cont_amount > 0) 7475 amount = cont_amount; 7476 else 7477 amount += ind_continuation; 7478 break; 7479 } 7480 7481 /* 7482 * Found a terminated line above a terminated line or "if" 7483 * etc. line. Use the amount of the line below us. 7484 * x = 1; x = 1; 7485 * if (asdf) y = 2; 7486 * while (asdf) ->here; 7487 * here; 7488 * ->foo; 7489 */ 7490 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_TERM) 7491 { 7492 if (!lookfor_break && whilelevel == 0) 7493 break; 7494 } 7495 7496 /* 7497 * First line above the one we're indenting is terminated. 7498 * To know what needs to be done look further backward for 7499 * a terminated line. 7500 */ 7501 else 7502 { 7503 /* 7504 * position the cursor over the rightmost paren, so 7505 * that matching it will take us back to the start of 7506 * the line. Helps for: 7507 * func(asdr, 7508 * asdfasdf); 7509 * here; 7510 */ 7511 term_again: 7512 l = ml_get_curline(); 7513 if (find_last_paren(l, '(', ')') 7514 && (trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen, 7515 ind_maxcomment)) != NULL) 7516 { 7517 /* 7518 * Check if we are on a case label now. This is 7519 * handled above. 7520 * case xx: if ( asdf && 7521 * asdf) 7522 */ 7523 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum; 7524 l = ml_get_curline(); 7525 if (cin_iscase(l) || cin_isscopedecl(l)) 7526 { 7527 ++curwin->w_cursor.lnum; 7528 continue; 7529 } 7530 } 7531 7532 /* When aligning with the case statement, don't align 7533 * with a statement after it. 7534 * case 1: { <-- don't use this { position 7535 * stat; 7536 * } 7537 * case 2: 7538 * stat; 7539 * } 7540 */ 7541 iscase = (ind_keep_case_label && cin_iscase(l)); 7542 7543 /* 7544 * Get indent and pointer to text for current line, 7545 * ignoring any jump label. 7546 */ 7547 amount = skip_label(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, 7548 &l, ind_maxcomment); 7549 7550 if (theline[0] == '{') 7551 amount += ind_open_extra; 7552 /* See remark above: "Only add ind_open_extra.." */ 7553 l = skipwhite(l); 7554 if (*l == '{') 7555 amount -= ind_open_extra; 7556 lookfor = iscase ? LOOKFOR_ANY : LOOKFOR_TERM; 7557 7558 /* 7559 * When a terminated line starts with "else" skip to 7560 * the matching "if": 7561 * else 3; 7562 * indent this; 7563 * Need to use the scope of this "else". XXX 7564 * If whilelevel != 0 continue looking for a "do {". 7565 */ 7566 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_TERM 7567 && *l != '}' 7568 && cin_iselse(l) 7569 && whilelevel == 0) 7570 { 7571 if ((trypos = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment)) 7572 == NULL 7573 || find_match(LOOKFOR_IF, trypos->lnum, 7574 ind_maxparen, ind_maxcomment) == FAIL) 7575 break; 7576 continue; 7577 } 7578 7579 /* 7580 * If we're at the end of a block, skip to the start of 7581 * that block. 7582 */ 7583 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0; 7584 if (*cin_skipcomment(l) == '}' 7585 && (trypos = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment)) 7586 != NULL) /* XXX */ 7587 { 7588 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum; 7589 /* if not "else {" check for terminated again */ 7590 /* but skip block for "} else {" */ 7591 l = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline()); 7592 if (*l == '}' || !cin_iselse(l)) 7593 goto term_again; 7594 ++curwin->w_cursor.lnum; 7595 } 7596 } 7597 } 7598 } 7599 } 7600 } 7601 7602 /* add extra indent for a comment */ 7603 if (cin_iscomment(theline)) 7604 amount += ind_comment; 7605 } 7606 7607 /* 7608 * ok -- we're not inside any sort of structure at all! 7609 * 7610 * this means we're at the top level, and everything should 7611 * basically just match where the previous line is, except 7612 * for the lines immediately following a function declaration, 7613 * which are K&R-style parameters and need to be indented. 7614 */ 7615 else 7616 { 7617 /* 7618 * if our line starts with an open brace, forget about any 7619 * prevailing indent and make sure it looks like the start 7620 * of a function 7621 */ 7622 7623 if (theline[0] == '{') 7624 { 7625 amount = ind_first_open; 7626 } 7627 7628 /* 7629 * If the NEXT line is a function declaration, the current 7630 * line needs to be indented as a function type spec. 7631 * Don't do this if the current line looks like a comment 7632 * or if the current line is terminated, ie. ends in ';'. 7633 */ 7634 else if (cur_curpos.lnum < curbuf->b_ml.ml_line_count 7635 && !cin_nocode(theline) 7636 && !cin_ends_in(theline, (char_u *)":", NULL) 7637 && !cin_ends_in(theline, (char_u *)",", NULL) 7638 && cin_isfuncdecl(NULL, cur_curpos.lnum + 1) 7639 && !cin_isterminated(theline, FALSE, TRUE)) 7640 { 7641 amount = ind_func_type; 7642 } 7643 else 7644 { 7645 amount = 0; 7646 curwin->w_cursor = cur_curpos; 7647 7648 /* search backwards until we find something we recognize */ 7649 7650 while (curwin->w_cursor.lnum > 1) 7651 { 7652 curwin->w_cursor.lnum--; 7653 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0; 7654 7655 l = ml_get_curline(); 7656 7657 /* 7658 * If we're in a comment now, skip to the start of the comment. 7659 */ /* XXX */ 7660 if ((trypos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL) 7661 { 7662 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum + 1; 7663 continue; 7664 } 7665 7666 /* 7667 * Are we at the start of a cpp base class declaration or 7668 * constructor initialization? 7669 */ /* XXX */ 7670 n = FALSE; 7671 if (ind_cpp_baseclass != 0 && theline[0] != '{') 7672 { 7673 n = cin_is_cpp_baseclass(l, &col); 7674 l = ml_get_curline(); 7675 } 7676 if (n) 7677 { 7678 /* XXX */ 7679 amount = get_baseclass_amount(col, ind_maxparen, 7680 ind_maxcomment, ind_cpp_baseclass); 7681 break; 7682 } 7683 7684 /* 7685 * Skip preprocessor directives and blank lines. 7686 */ 7687 if (cin_ispreproc_cont(&l, &curwin->w_cursor.lnum)) 7688 continue; 7689 7690 if (cin_nocode(l)) 7691 continue; 7692 7693 /* 7694 * If the previous line ends in ',', use one level of 7695 * indentation: 7696 * int foo, 7697 * bar; 7698 * do this before checking for '}' in case of eg. 7699 * enum foobar 7700 * { 7701 * ... 7702 * } foo, 7703 * bar; 7704 */ 7705 n = 0; 7706 if (cin_ends_in(l, (char_u *)",", NULL) 7707 || (*l != NUL && (n = l[STRLEN(l) - 1]) == '\\')) 7708 { 7709 /* take us back to opening paren */ 7710 if (find_last_paren(l, '(', ')') 7711 && (trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen, 7712 ind_maxcomment)) != NULL) 7713 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum; 7714 7715 /* For a line ending in ',' that is a continuation line go 7716 * back to the first line with a backslash: 7717 * char *foo = "bla\ 7718 * bla", 7719 * here; 7720 */ 7721 while (n == 0 && curwin->w_cursor.lnum > 1) 7722 { 7723 l = ml_get(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1); 7724 if (*l == NUL || l[STRLEN(l) - 1] != '\\') 7725 break; 7726 --curwin->w_cursor.lnum; 7727 } 7728 7729 amount = get_indent(); /* XXX */ 7730 7731 if (amount == 0) 7732 amount = cin_first_id_amount(); 7733 if (amount == 0) 7734 amount = ind_continuation; 7735 break; 7736 } 7737 7738 /* 7739 * If the line looks like a function declaration, and we're 7740 * not in a comment, put it the left margin. 7741 */ 7742 if (cin_isfuncdecl(NULL, cur_curpos.lnum)) /* XXX */ 7743 break; 7744 l = ml_get_curline(); 7745 7746 /* 7747 * Finding the closing '}' of a previous function. Put 7748 * current line at the left margin. For when 'cino' has "fs". 7749 */ 7750 if (*skipwhite(l) == '}') 7751 break; 7752 7753 /* (matching {) 7754 * If the previous line ends on '};' (maybe followed by 7755 * comments) align at column 0. For example: 7756 * char *string_array[] = { "foo", 7757 * / * x * / "b};ar" }; / * foobar * / 7758 */ 7759 if (cin_ends_in(l, (char_u *)"};", NULL)) 7760 break; 7761 7762 /* 7763 * If the PREVIOUS line is a function declaration, the current 7764 * line (and the ones that follow) needs to be indented as 7765 * parameters. 7766 */ 7767 if (cin_isfuncdecl(&l, curwin->w_cursor.lnum)) 7768 { 7769 amount = ind_param; 7770 break; 7771 } 7772 7773 /* 7774 * If the previous line ends in ';' and the line before the 7775 * previous line ends in ',' or '\', ident to column zero: 7776 * int foo, 7777 * bar; 7778 * indent_to_0 here; 7779 */ 7780 if (cin_ends_in(l, (char_u *)";", NULL)) 7781 { 7782 l = ml_get(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1); 7783 if (cin_ends_in(l, (char_u *)",", NULL) 7784 || (*l != NUL && l[STRLEN(l) - 1] == '\\')) 7785 break; 7786 l = ml_get_curline(); 7787 } 7788 7789 /* 7790 * Doesn't look like anything interesting -- so just 7791 * use the indent of this line. 7792 * 7793 * Position the cursor over the rightmost paren, so that 7794 * matching it will take us back to the start of the line. 7795 */ 7796 find_last_paren(l, '(', ')'); 7797 7798 if ((trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen, 7799 ind_maxcomment)) != NULL) 7800 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum; 7801 amount = get_indent(); /* XXX */ 7802 break; 7803 } 7804 7805 /* add extra indent for a comment */ 7806 if (cin_iscomment(theline)) 7807 amount += ind_comment; 7808 7809 /* add extra indent if the previous line ended in a backslash: 7810 * "asdfasdf\ 7811 * here"; 7812 * char *foo = "asdf\ 7813 * here"; 7814 */ 7815 if (cur_curpos.lnum > 1) 7816 { 7817 l = ml_get(cur_curpos.lnum - 1); 7818 if (*l != NUL && l[STRLEN(l) - 1] == '\\') 7819 { 7820 cur_amount = cin_get_equal_amount(cur_curpos.lnum - 1); 7821 if (cur_amount > 0) 7822 amount = cur_amount; 7823 else if (cur_amount == 0) 7824 amount += ind_continuation; 7825 } 7826 } 7827 } 7828 } 7829 7830 theend: 7831 /* put the cursor back where it belongs */ 7832 curwin->w_cursor = cur_curpos; 7833 7834 vim_free(linecopy); 7835 7836 if (amount < 0) 7837 return 0; 7838 return amount; 7839 } 7840 7841 static int 7842 find_match(lookfor, ourscope, ind_maxparen, ind_maxcomment) 7843 int lookfor; 7844 linenr_T ourscope; 7845 int ind_maxparen; 7846 int ind_maxcomment; 7847 { 7848 char_u *look; 7849 pos_T *theirscope; 7850 char_u *mightbeif; 7851 int elselevel; 7852 int whilelevel; 7853 7854 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_IF) 7855 { 7856 elselevel = 1; 7857 whilelevel = 0; 7858 } 7859 else 7860 { 7861 elselevel = 0; 7862 whilelevel = 1; 7863 } 7864 7865 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0; 7866 7867 while (curwin->w_cursor.lnum > ourscope + 1) 7868 { 7869 curwin->w_cursor.lnum--; 7870 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0; 7871 7872 look = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline()); 7873 if (cin_iselse(look) 7874 || cin_isif(look) 7875 || cin_isdo(look) /* XXX */ 7876 || cin_iswhileofdo(look, curwin->w_cursor.lnum, ind_maxparen)) 7877 { 7878 /* 7879 * if we've gone outside the braces entirely, 7880 * we must be out of scope... 7881 */ 7882 theirscope = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment); /* XXX */ 7883 if (theirscope == NULL) 7884 break; 7885 7886 /* 7887 * and if the brace enclosing this is further 7888 * back than the one enclosing the else, we're 7889 * out of luck too. 7890 */ 7891 if (theirscope->lnum < ourscope) 7892 break; 7893 7894 /* 7895 * and if they're enclosed in a *deeper* brace, 7896 * then we can ignore it because it's in a 7897 * different scope... 7898 */ 7899 if (theirscope->lnum > ourscope) 7900 continue; 7901 7902 /* 7903 * if it was an "else" (that's not an "else if") 7904 * then we need to go back to another if, so 7905 * increment elselevel 7906 */ 7907 look = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline()); 7908 if (cin_iselse(look)) 7909 { 7910 mightbeif = cin_skipcomment(look + 4); 7911 if (!cin_isif(mightbeif)) 7912 ++elselevel; 7913 continue; 7914 } 7915 7916 /* 7917 * if it was a "while" then we need to go back to 7918 * another "do", so increment whilelevel. XXX 7919 */ 7920 if (cin_iswhileofdo(look, curwin->w_cursor.lnum, ind_maxparen)) 7921 { 7922 ++whilelevel; 7923 continue; 7924 } 7925 7926 /* If it's an "if" decrement elselevel */ 7927 look = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline()); 7928 if (cin_isif(look)) 7929 { 7930 elselevel--; 7931 /* 7932 * When looking for an "if" ignore "while"s that 7933 * get in the way. 7934 */ 7935 if (elselevel == 0 && lookfor == LOOKFOR_IF) 7936 whilelevel = 0; 7937 } 7938 7939 /* If it's a "do" decrement whilelevel */ 7940 if (cin_isdo(look)) 7941 whilelevel--; 7942 7943 /* 7944 * if we've used up all the elses, then 7945 * this must be the if that we want! 7946 * match the indent level of that if. 7947 */ 7948 if (elselevel <= 0 && whilelevel <= 0) 7949 { 7950 return OK; 7951 } 7952 } 7953 } 7954 return FAIL; 7955 } 7956 7957 # if defined(FEAT_EVAL) || defined(PROTO) 7958 /* 7959 * Get indent level from 'indentexpr'. 7960 */ 7961 int 7962 get_expr_indent() 7963 { 7964 int indent; 7965 pos_T pos; 7966 int save_State; 7967 int use_sandbox = was_set_insecurely((char_u *)"indentexpr", 7968 OPT_LOCAL); 7969 7970 pos = curwin->w_cursor; 7971 set_vim_var_nr(VV_LNUM, curwin->w_cursor.lnum); 7972 if (use_sandbox) 7973 ++sandbox; 7974 ++textlock; 7975 indent = eval_to_number(curbuf->b_p_inde); 7976 if (use_sandbox) 7977 --sandbox; 7978 --textlock; 7979 7980 /* Restore the cursor position so that 'indentexpr' doesn't need to. 7981 * Pretend to be in Insert mode, allow cursor past end of line for "o" 7982 * command. */ 7983 save_State = State; 7984 State = INSERT; 7985 curwin->w_cursor = pos; 7986 check_cursor(); 7987 State = save_State; 7988 7989 /* If there is an error, just keep the current indent. */ 7990 if (indent < 0) 7991 indent = get_indent(); 7992 7993 return indent; 7994 } 7995 # endif 7996 7997 #endif /* FEAT_CINDENT */ 7998 7999 #if defined(FEAT_LISP) || defined(PROTO) 8000 8001 static int lisp_match __ARGS((char_u *p)); 8002 8003 static int 8004 lisp_match(p) 8005 char_u *p; 8006 { 8007 char_u buf[LSIZE]; 8008 int len; 8009 char_u *word = p_lispwords; 8010 8011 while (*word != NUL) 8012 { 8013 (void)copy_option_part(&word, buf, LSIZE, ","); 8014 len = (int)STRLEN(buf); 8015 if (STRNCMP(buf, p, len) == 0 && p[len] == ' ') 8016 return TRUE; 8017 } 8018 return FALSE; 8019 } 8020 8021 /* 8022 * When 'p' is present in 'cpoptions, a Vi compatible method is used. 8023 * The incompatible newer method is quite a bit better at indenting 8024 * code in lisp-like languages than the traditional one; it's still 8025 * mostly heuristics however -- Dirk van Deun, [email protected] 8026 * 8027 * TODO: 8028 * Findmatch() should be adapted for lisp, also to make showmatch 8029 * work correctly: now (v5.3) it seems all C/C++ oriented: 8030 * - it does not recognize the #\( and #\) notations as character literals 8031 * - it doesn't know about comments starting with a semicolon 8032 * - it incorrectly interprets '(' as a character literal 8033 * All this messes up get_lisp_indent in some rare cases. 8034 * Update from Sergey Khorev: 8035 * I tried to fix the first two issues. 8036 */ 8037 int 8038 get_lisp_indent() 8039 { 8040 pos_T *pos, realpos, paren; 8041 int amount; 8042 char_u *that; 8043 colnr_T col; 8044 colnr_T firsttry; 8045 int parencount, quotecount; 8046 int vi_lisp; 8047 8048 /* Set vi_lisp to use the vi-compatible method */ 8049 vi_lisp = (vim_strchr(p_cpo, CPO_LISP) != NULL); 8050 8051 realpos = curwin->w_cursor; 8052 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0; 8053 8054 if ((pos = findmatch(NULL, '(')) == NULL) 8055 pos = findmatch(NULL, '['); 8056 else 8057 { 8058 paren = *pos; 8059 pos = findmatch(NULL, '['); 8060 if (pos == NULL || ltp(pos, &paren)) 8061 pos = &paren; 8062 } 8063 if (pos != NULL) 8064 { 8065 /* Extra trick: Take the indent of the first previous non-white 8066 * line that is at the same () level. */ 8067 amount = -1; 8068 parencount = 0; 8069 8070 while (--curwin->w_cursor.lnum >= pos->lnum) 8071 { 8072 if (linewhite(curwin->w_cursor.lnum)) 8073 continue; 8074 for (that = ml_get_curline(); *that != NUL; ++that) 8075 { 8076 if (*that == ';') 8077 { 8078 while (*(that + 1) != NUL) 8079 ++that; 8080 continue; 8081 } 8082 if (*that == '\\') 8083 { 8084 if (*(that + 1) != NUL) 8085 ++that; 8086 continue; 8087 } 8088 if (*that == '"' && *(that + 1) != NUL) 8089 { 8090 while (*++that && *that != '"') 8091 { 8092 /* skipping escaped characters in the string */ 8093 if (*that == '\\') 8094 { 8095 if (*++that == NUL) 8096 break; 8097 if (that[1] == NUL) 8098 { 8099 ++that; 8100 break; 8101 } 8102 } 8103 } 8104 } 8105 if (*that == '(' || *that == '[') 8106 ++parencount; 8107 else if (*that == ')' || *that == ']') 8108 --parencount; 8109 } 8110 if (parencount == 0) 8111 { 8112 amount = get_indent(); 8113 break; 8114 } 8115 } 8116 8117 if (amount == -1) 8118 { 8119 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = pos->lnum; 8120 curwin->w_cursor.col = pos->col; 8121 col = pos->col; 8122 8123 that = ml_get_curline(); 8124 8125 if (vi_lisp && get_indent() == 0) 8126 amount = 2; 8127 else 8128 { 8129 amount = 0; 8130 while (*that && col) 8131 { 8132 amount += lbr_chartabsize_adv(&that, (colnr_T)amount); 8133 col--; 8134 } 8135 8136 /* 8137 * Some keywords require "body" indenting rules (the 8138 * non-standard-lisp ones are Scheme special forms): 8139 * 8140 * (let ((a 1)) instead (let ((a 1)) 8141 * (...)) of (...)) 8142 */ 8143 8144 if (!vi_lisp && (*that == '(' || *that == '[') 8145 && lisp_match(that + 1)) 8146 amount += 2; 8147 else 8148 { 8149 that++; 8150 amount++; 8151 firsttry = amount; 8152 8153 while (vim_iswhite(*that)) 8154 { 8155 amount += lbr_chartabsize(that, (colnr_T)amount); 8156 ++that; 8157 } 8158 8159 if (*that && *that != ';') /* not a comment line */ 8160 { 8161 /* test *that != '(' to accomodate first let/do 8162 * argument if it is more than one line */ 8163 if (!vi_lisp && *that != '(' && *that != '[') 8164 firsttry++; 8165 8166 parencount = 0; 8167 quotecount = 0; 8168 8169 if (vi_lisp 8170 || (*that != '"' 8171 && *that != '\'' 8172 && *that != '#' 8173 && (*that < '0' || *that > '9'))) 8174 { 8175 while (*that 8176 && (!vim_iswhite(*that) 8177 || quotecount 8178 || parencount) 8179 && (!((*that == '(' || *that == '[') 8180 && !quotecount 8181 && !parencount 8182 && vi_lisp))) 8183 { 8184 if (*that == '"') 8185 quotecount = !quotecount; 8186 if ((*that == '(' || *that == '[') 8187 && !quotecount) 8188 ++parencount; 8189 if ((*that == ')' || *that == ']') 8190 && !quotecount) 8191 --parencount; 8192 if (*that == '\\' && *(that+1) != NUL) 8193 amount += lbr_chartabsize_adv(&that, 8194 (colnr_T)amount); 8195 amount += lbr_chartabsize_adv(&that, 8196 (colnr_T)amount); 8197 } 8198 } 8199 while (vim_iswhite(*that)) 8200 { 8201 amount += lbr_chartabsize(that, (colnr_T)amount); 8202 that++; 8203 } 8204 if (!*that || *that == ';') 8205 amount = firsttry; 8206 } 8207 } 8208 } 8209 } 8210 } 8211 else 8212 amount = 0; /* no matching '(' or '[' found, use zero indent */ 8213 8214 curwin->w_cursor = realpos; 8215 8216 return amount; 8217 } 8218 #endif /* FEAT_LISP */ 8219 8220 void 8221 prepare_to_exit() 8222 { 8223 #if defined(SIGHUP) && defined(SIG_IGN) 8224 /* Ignore SIGHUP, because a dropped connection causes a read error, which 8225 * makes Vim exit and then handling SIGHUP causes various reentrance 8226 * problems. */ 8227 signal(SIGHUP, SIG_IGN); 8228 #endif 8229 8230 #ifdef FEAT_GUI 8231 if (gui.in_use) 8232 { 8233 gui.dying = TRUE; 8234 out_trash(); /* trash any pending output */ 8235 } 8236 else 8237 #endif 8238 { 8239 windgoto((int)Rows - 1, 0); 8240 8241 /* 8242 * Switch terminal mode back now, so messages end up on the "normal" 8243 * screen (if there are two screens). 8244 */ 8245 settmode(TMODE_COOK); 8246 #ifdef WIN3264 8247 if (can_end_termcap_mode(FALSE) == TRUE) 8248 #endif 8249 stoptermcap(); 8250 out_flush(); 8251 } 8252 } 8253 8254 /* 8255 * Preserve files and exit. 8256 * When called IObuff must contain a message. 8257 */ 8258 void 8259 preserve_exit() 8260 { 8261 buf_T *buf; 8262 8263 prepare_to_exit(); 8264 8265 /* Setting this will prevent free() calls. That avoids calling free() 8266 * recursively when free() was invoked with a bad pointer. */ 8267 really_exiting = TRUE; 8268 8269 out_str(IObuff); 8270 screen_start(); /* don't know where cursor is now */ 8271 out_flush(); 8272 8273 ml_close_notmod(); /* close all not-modified buffers */ 8274 8275 for (buf = firstbuf; buf != NULL; buf = buf->b_next) 8276 { 8277 if (buf->b_ml.ml_mfp != NULL && buf->b_ml.ml_mfp->mf_fname != NULL) 8278 { 8279 OUT_STR(_("Vim: preserving files...\n")); 8280 screen_start(); /* don't know where cursor is now */ 8281 out_flush(); 8282 ml_sync_all(FALSE, FALSE); /* preserve all swap files */ 8283 break; 8284 } 8285 } 8286 8287 ml_close_all(FALSE); /* close all memfiles, without deleting */ 8288 8289 OUT_STR(_("Vim: Finished.\n")); 8290 8291 getout(1); 8292 } 8293 8294 /* 8295 * return TRUE if "fname" exists. 8296 */ 8297 int 8298 vim_fexists(fname) 8299 char_u *fname; 8300 { 8301 struct stat st; 8302 8303 if (mch_stat((char *)fname, &st)) 8304 return FALSE; 8305 return TRUE; 8306 } 8307 8308 /* 8309 * Check for CTRL-C pressed, but only once in a while. 8310 * Should be used instead of ui_breakcheck() for functions that check for 8311 * each line in the file. Calling ui_breakcheck() each time takes too much 8312 * time, because it can be a system call. 8313 */ 8314 8315 #ifndef BREAKCHECK_SKIP 8316 # ifdef FEAT_GUI /* assume the GUI only runs on fast computers */ 8317 # define BREAKCHECK_SKIP 200 8318 # else 8319 # define BREAKCHECK_SKIP 32 8320 # endif 8321 #endif 8322 8323 static int breakcheck_count = 0; 8324 8325 void 8326 line_breakcheck() 8327 { 8328 if (++breakcheck_count >= BREAKCHECK_SKIP) 8329 { 8330 breakcheck_count = 0; 8331 ui_breakcheck(); 8332 } 8333 } 8334 8335 /* 8336 * Like line_breakcheck() but check 10 times less often. 8337 */ 8338 void 8339 fast_breakcheck() 8340 { 8341 if (++breakcheck_count >= BREAKCHECK_SKIP * 10) 8342 { 8343 breakcheck_count = 0; 8344 ui_breakcheck(); 8345 } 8346 } 8347 8348 /* 8349 * Expand wildcards. Calls gen_expand_wildcards() and removes files matching 8350 * 'wildignore'. 8351 * Returns OK or FAIL. 8352 */ 8353 int 8354 expand_wildcards(num_pat, pat, num_file, file, flags) 8355 int num_pat; /* number of input patterns */ 8356 char_u **pat; /* array of input patterns */ 8357 int *num_file; /* resulting number of files */ 8358 char_u ***file; /* array of resulting files */ 8359 int flags; /* EW_DIR, etc. */ 8360 { 8361 int retval; 8362 int i, j; 8363 char_u *p; 8364 int non_suf_match; /* number without matching suffix */ 8365 8366 retval = gen_expand_wildcards(num_pat, pat, num_file, file, flags); 8367 8368 /* When keeping all matches, return here */ 8369 if (flags & EW_KEEPALL) 8370 return retval; 8371 8372 #ifdef FEAT_WILDIGN 8373 /* 8374 * Remove names that match 'wildignore'. 8375 */ 8376 if (*p_wig) 8377 { 8378 char_u *ffname; 8379 8380 /* check all files in (*file)[] */ 8381 for (i = 0; i < *num_file; ++i) 8382 { 8383 ffname = FullName_save((*file)[i], FALSE); 8384 if (ffname == NULL) /* out of memory */ 8385 break; 8386 # ifdef VMS 8387 vms_remove_version(ffname); 8388 # endif 8389 if (match_file_list(p_wig, (*file)[i], ffname)) 8390 { 8391 /* remove this matching file from the list */ 8392 vim_free((*file)[i]); 8393 for (j = i; j + 1 < *num_file; ++j) 8394 (*file)[j] = (*file)[j + 1]; 8395 --*num_file; 8396 --i; 8397 } 8398 vim_free(ffname); 8399 } 8400 } 8401 #endif 8402 8403 /* 8404 * Move the names where 'suffixes' match to the end. 8405 */ 8406 if (*num_file > 1) 8407 { 8408 non_suf_match = 0; 8409 for (i = 0; i < *num_file; ++i) 8410 { 8411 if (!match_suffix((*file)[i])) 8412 { 8413 /* 8414 * Move the name without matching suffix to the front 8415 * of the list. 8416 */ 8417 p = (*file)[i]; 8418 for (j = i; j > non_suf_match; --j) 8419 (*file)[j] = (*file)[j - 1]; 8420 (*file)[non_suf_match++] = p; 8421 } 8422 } 8423 } 8424 8425 return retval; 8426 } 8427 8428 /* 8429 * Return TRUE if "fname" matches with an entry in 'suffixes'. 8430 */ 8431 int 8432 match_suffix(fname) 8433 char_u *fname; 8434 { 8435 int fnamelen, setsuflen; 8436 char_u *setsuf; 8437 #define MAXSUFLEN 30 /* maximum length of a file suffix */ 8438 char_u suf_buf[MAXSUFLEN]; 8439 8440 fnamelen = (int)STRLEN(fname); 8441 setsuflen = 0; 8442 for (setsuf = p_su; *setsuf; ) 8443 { 8444 setsuflen = copy_option_part(&setsuf, suf_buf, MAXSUFLEN, ".,"); 8445 if (fnamelen >= setsuflen 8446 && fnamencmp(suf_buf, fname + fnamelen - setsuflen, 8447 (size_t)setsuflen) == 0) 8448 break; 8449 setsuflen = 0; 8450 } 8451 return (setsuflen != 0); 8452 } 8453 8454 #if !defined(NO_EXPANDPATH) || defined(PROTO) 8455 8456 # ifdef VIM_BACKTICK 8457 static int vim_backtick __ARGS((char_u *p)); 8458 static int expand_backtick __ARGS((garray_T *gap, char_u *pat, int flags)); 8459 # endif 8460 8461 # if defined(MSDOS) || defined(FEAT_GUI_W16) || defined(WIN3264) 8462 /* 8463 * File name expansion code for MS-DOS, Win16 and Win32. It's here because 8464 * it's shared between these systems. 8465 */ 8466 # if defined(DJGPP) || defined(PROTO) 8467 # define _cdecl /* DJGPP doesn't have this */ 8468 # else 8469 # ifdef __BORLANDC__ 8470 # define _cdecl _RTLENTRYF 8471 # endif 8472 # endif 8473 8474 /* 8475 * comparison function for qsort in dos_expandpath() 8476 */ 8477 static int _cdecl 8478 pstrcmp(const void *a, const void *b) 8479 { 8480 return (pathcmp(*(char **)a, *(char **)b, -1)); 8481 } 8482 8483 # ifndef WIN3264 8484 static void 8485 namelowcpy( 8486 char_u *d, 8487 char_u *s) 8488 { 8489 # ifdef DJGPP 8490 if (USE_LONG_FNAME) /* don't lower case on Windows 95/NT systems */ 8491 while (*s) 8492 *d++ = *s++; 8493 else 8494 # endif 8495 while (*s) 8496 *d++ = TOLOWER_LOC(*s++); 8497 *d = NUL; 8498 } 8499 # endif 8500 8501 /* 8502 * Recursively expand one path component into all matching files and/or 8503 * directories. Adds matches to "gap". Handles "*", "?", "[a-z]", "**", etc. 8504 * Return the number of matches found. 8505 * "path" has backslashes before chars that are not to be expanded, starting 8506 * at "path[wildoff]". 8507 * Return the number of matches found. 8508 * NOTE: much of this is identical to unix_expandpath(), keep in sync! 8509 */ 8510 static int 8511 dos_expandpath( 8512 garray_T *gap, 8513 char_u *path, 8514 int wildoff, 8515 int flags, /* EW_* flags */ 8516 int didstar) /* expaneded "**" once already */ 8517 { 8518 char_u *buf; 8519 char_u *path_end; 8520 char_u *p, *s, *e; 8521 int start_len = gap->ga_len; 8522 char_u *pat; 8523 regmatch_T regmatch; 8524 int starts_with_dot; 8525 int matches; 8526 int len; 8527 int starstar = FALSE; 8528 static int stardepth = 0; /* depth for "**" expansion */ 8529 #ifdef WIN3264 8530 WIN32_FIND_DATA fb; 8531 HANDLE hFind = (HANDLE)0; 8532 # ifdef FEAT_MBYTE 8533 WIN32_FIND_DATAW wfb; 8534 WCHAR *wn = NULL; /* UCS-2 name, NULL when not used. */ 8535 # endif 8536 #else 8537 struct ffblk fb; 8538 #endif 8539 char_u *matchname; 8540 int ok; 8541 8542 /* Expanding "**" may take a long time, check for CTRL-C. */ 8543 if (stardepth > 0) 8544 { 8545 ui_breakcheck(); 8546 if (got_int) 8547 return 0; 8548 } 8549 8550 /* make room for file name */ 8551 buf = alloc((int)STRLEN(path) + BASENAMELEN + 5); 8552 if (buf == NULL) 8553 return 0; 8554 8555 /* 8556 * Find the first part in the path name that contains a wildcard or a ~1. 8557 * Copy it into buf, including the preceding characters. 8558 */ 8559 p = buf; 8560 s = buf; 8561 e = NULL; 8562 path_end = path; 8563 while (*path_end != NUL) 8564 { 8565 /* May ignore a wildcard that has a backslash before it; it will 8566 * be removed by rem_backslash() or file_pat_to_reg_pat() below. */ 8567 if (path_end >= path + wildoff && rem_backslash(path_end)) 8568 *p++ = *path_end++; 8569 else if (*path_end == '\\' || *path_end == ':' || *path_end == '/') 8570 { 8571 if (e != NULL) 8572 break; 8573 s = p + 1; 8574 } 8575 else if (path_end >= path + wildoff 8576 && vim_strchr((char_u *)"*?[~", *path_end) != NULL) 8577 e = p; 8578 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE 8579 if (has_mbyte) 8580 { 8581 len = (*mb_ptr2len)(path_end); 8582 STRNCPY(p, path_end, len); 8583 p += len; 8584 path_end += len; 8585 } 8586 else 8587 #endif 8588 *p++ = *path_end++; 8589 } 8590 e = p; 8591 *e = NUL; 8592 8593 /* now we have one wildcard component between s and e */ 8594 /* Remove backslashes between "wildoff" and the start of the wildcard 8595 * component. */ 8596 for (p = buf + wildoff; p < s; ++p) 8597 if (rem_backslash(p)) 8598 { 8599 STRCPY(p, p + 1); 8600 --e; 8601 --s; 8602 } 8603 8604 /* Check for "**" between "s" and "e". */ 8605 for (p = s; p < e; ++p) 8606 if (p[0] == '*' && p[1] == '*') 8607 starstar = TRUE; 8608 8609 starts_with_dot = (*s == '.'); 8610 pat = file_pat_to_reg_pat(s, e, NULL, FALSE); 8611 if (pat == NULL) 8612 { 8613 vim_free(buf); 8614 return 0; 8615 } 8616 8617 /* compile the regexp into a program */ 8618 regmatch.rm_ic = TRUE; /* Always ignore case */ 8619 regmatch.regprog = vim_regcomp(pat, RE_MAGIC); 8620 vim_free(pat); 8621 8622 if (regmatch.regprog == NULL) 8623 { 8624 vim_free(buf); 8625 return 0; 8626 } 8627 8628 /* remember the pattern or file name being looked for */ 8629 matchname = vim_strsave(s); 8630 8631 /* If "**" is by itself, this is the first time we encounter it and more 8632 * is following then find matches without any directory. */ 8633 if (!didstar && stardepth < 100 && starstar && e - s == 2 8634 && *path_end == '/') 8635 { 8636 STRCPY(s, path_end + 1); 8637 ++stardepth; 8638 (void)dos_expandpath(gap, buf, (int)(s - buf), flags, TRUE); 8639 --stardepth; 8640 } 8641 8642 /* Scan all files in the directory with "dir/ *.*" */ 8643 STRCPY(s, "*.*"); 8644 #ifdef WIN3264 8645 # ifdef FEAT_MBYTE 8646 if (enc_codepage >= 0 && (int)GetACP() != enc_codepage) 8647 { 8648 /* The active codepage differs from 'encoding'. Attempt using the 8649 * wide function. If it fails because it is not implemented fall back 8650 * to the non-wide version (for Windows 98) */ 8651 wn = enc_to_ucs2(buf, NULL); 8652 if (wn != NULL) 8653 { 8654 hFind = FindFirstFileW(wn, &wfb); 8655 if (hFind == INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE 8656 && GetLastError() == ERROR_CALL_NOT_IMPLEMENTED) 8657 { 8658 vim_free(wn); 8659 wn = NULL; 8660 } 8661 } 8662 } 8663 8664 if (wn == NULL) 8665 # endif 8666 hFind = FindFirstFile(buf, &fb); 8667 ok = (hFind != INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE); 8668 #else 8669 /* If we are expanding wildcards we try both files and directories */ 8670 ok = (findfirst((char *)buf, &fb, 8671 (*path_end != NUL || (flags & EW_DIR)) ? FA_DIREC : 0) == 0); 8672 #endif 8673 8674 while (ok) 8675 { 8676 #ifdef WIN3264 8677 # ifdef FEAT_MBYTE 8678 if (wn != NULL) 8679 p = ucs2_to_enc(wfb.cFileName, NULL); /* p is allocated here */ 8680 else 8681 # endif 8682 p = (char_u *)fb.cFileName; 8683 #else 8684 p = (char_u *)fb.ff_name; 8685 #endif 8686 /* Ignore entries starting with a dot, unless when asked for. Accept 8687 * all entries found with "matchname". */ 8688 if ((p[0] != '.' || starts_with_dot) 8689 && (matchname == NULL 8690 || vim_regexec(®match, p, (colnr_T)0))) 8691 { 8692 #ifdef WIN3264 8693 STRCPY(s, p); 8694 #else 8695 namelowcpy(s, p); 8696 #endif 8697 len = (int)STRLEN(buf); 8698 8699 if (starstar && stardepth < 100) 8700 { 8701 /* For "**" in the pattern first go deeper in the tree to 8702 * find matches. */ 8703 STRCPY(buf + len, "/**"); 8704 STRCPY(buf + len + 3, path_end); 8705 ++stardepth; 8706 (void)dos_expandpath(gap, buf, len + 1, flags, TRUE); 8707 --stardepth; 8708 } 8709 8710 STRCPY(buf + len, path_end); 8711 if (mch_has_exp_wildcard(path_end)) 8712 { 8713 /* need to expand another component of the path */ 8714 /* remove backslashes for the remaining components only */ 8715 (void)dos_expandpath(gap, buf, len + 1, flags, FALSE); 8716 } 8717 else 8718 { 8719 /* no more wildcards, check if there is a match */ 8720 /* remove backslashes for the remaining components only */ 8721 if (*path_end != 0) 8722 backslash_halve(buf + len + 1); 8723 if (mch_getperm(buf) >= 0) /* add existing file */ 8724 addfile(gap, buf, flags); 8725 } 8726 } 8727 8728 #ifdef WIN3264 8729 # ifdef FEAT_MBYTE 8730 if (wn != NULL) 8731 { 8732 vim_free(p); 8733 ok = FindNextFileW(hFind, &wfb); 8734 } 8735 else 8736 # endif 8737 ok = FindNextFile(hFind, &fb); 8738 #else 8739 ok = (findnext(&fb) == 0); 8740 #endif 8741 8742 /* If no more matches and no match was used, try expanding the name 8743 * itself. Finds the long name of a short filename. */ 8744 if (!ok && matchname != NULL && gap->ga_len == start_len) 8745 { 8746 STRCPY(s, matchname); 8747 #ifdef WIN3264 8748 FindClose(hFind); 8749 # ifdef FEAT_MBYTE 8750 if (wn != NULL) 8751 { 8752 vim_free(wn); 8753 wn = enc_to_ucs2(buf, NULL); 8754 if (wn != NULL) 8755 hFind = FindFirstFileW(wn, &wfb); 8756 } 8757 if (wn == NULL) 8758 # endif 8759 hFind = FindFirstFile(buf, &fb); 8760 ok = (hFind != INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE); 8761 #else 8762 ok = (findfirst((char *)buf, &fb, 8763 (*path_end != NUL || (flags & EW_DIR)) ? FA_DIREC : 0) == 0); 8764 #endif 8765 vim_free(matchname); 8766 matchname = NULL; 8767 } 8768 } 8769 8770 #ifdef WIN3264 8771 FindClose(hFind); 8772 # ifdef FEAT_MBYTE 8773 vim_free(wn); 8774 # endif 8775 #endif 8776 vim_free(buf); 8777 vim_free(regmatch.regprog); 8778 vim_free(matchname); 8779 8780 matches = gap->ga_len - start_len; 8781 if (matches > 0) 8782 qsort(((char_u **)gap->ga_data) + start_len, (size_t)matches, 8783 sizeof(char_u *), pstrcmp); 8784 return matches; 8785 } 8786 8787 int 8788 mch_expandpath( 8789 garray_T *gap, 8790 char_u *path, 8791 int flags) /* EW_* flags */ 8792 { 8793 return dos_expandpath(gap, path, 0, flags, FALSE); 8794 } 8795 # endif /* MSDOS || FEAT_GUI_W16 || WIN3264 */ 8796 8797 #if (defined(UNIX) && !defined(VMS)) || defined(USE_UNIXFILENAME) \ 8798 || defined(PROTO) 8799 /* 8800 * Unix style wildcard expansion code. 8801 * It's here because it's used both for Unix and Mac. 8802 */ 8803 static int pstrcmp __ARGS((const void *, const void *)); 8804 8805 static int 8806 pstrcmp(a, b) 8807 const void *a, *b; 8808 { 8809 return (pathcmp(*(char **)a, *(char **)b, -1)); 8810 } 8811 8812 /* 8813 * Recursively expand one path component into all matching files and/or 8814 * directories. Adds matches to "gap". Handles "*", "?", "[a-z]", "**", etc. 8815 * "path" has backslashes before chars that are not to be expanded, starting 8816 * at "path + wildoff". 8817 * Return the number of matches found. 8818 * NOTE: much of this is identical to dos_expandpath(), keep in sync! 8819 */ 8820 int 8821 unix_expandpath(gap, path, wildoff, flags, didstar) 8822 garray_T *gap; 8823 char_u *path; 8824 int wildoff; 8825 int flags; /* EW_* flags */ 8826 int didstar; /* expanded "**" once already */ 8827 { 8828 char_u *buf; 8829 char_u *path_end; 8830 char_u *p, *s, *e; 8831 int start_len = gap->ga_len; 8832 char_u *pat; 8833 regmatch_T regmatch; 8834 int starts_with_dot; 8835 int matches; 8836 int len; 8837 int starstar = FALSE; 8838 static int stardepth = 0; /* depth for "**" expansion */ 8839 8840 DIR *dirp; 8841 struct dirent *dp; 8842 8843 /* Expanding "**" may take a long time, check for CTRL-C. */ 8844 if (stardepth > 0) 8845 { 8846 ui_breakcheck(); 8847 if (got_int) 8848 return 0; 8849 } 8850 8851 /* make room for file name */ 8852 buf = alloc((int)STRLEN(path) + BASENAMELEN + 5); 8853 if (buf == NULL) 8854 return 0; 8855 8856 /* 8857 * Find the first part in the path name that contains a wildcard. 8858 * Copy it into "buf", including the preceding characters. 8859 */ 8860 p = buf; 8861 s = buf; 8862 e = NULL; 8863 path_end = path; 8864 while (*path_end != NUL) 8865 { 8866 /* May ignore a wildcard that has a backslash before it; it will 8867 * be removed by rem_backslash() or file_pat_to_reg_pat() below. */ 8868 if (path_end >= path + wildoff && rem_backslash(path_end)) 8869 *p++ = *path_end++; 8870 else if (*path_end == '/') 8871 { 8872 if (e != NULL) 8873 break; 8874 s = p + 1; 8875 } 8876 else if (path_end >= path + wildoff 8877 && vim_strchr((char_u *)"*?[{~$", *path_end) != NULL) 8878 e = p; 8879 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE 8880 if (has_mbyte) 8881 { 8882 len = (*mb_ptr2len)(path_end); 8883 STRNCPY(p, path_end, len); 8884 p += len; 8885 path_end += len; 8886 } 8887 else 8888 #endif 8889 *p++ = *path_end++; 8890 } 8891 e = p; 8892 *e = NUL; 8893 8894 /* now we have one wildcard component between "s" and "e" */ 8895 /* Remove backslashes between "wildoff" and the start of the wildcard 8896 * component. */ 8897 for (p = buf + wildoff; p < s; ++p) 8898 if (rem_backslash(p)) 8899 { 8900 STRCPY(p, p + 1); 8901 --e; 8902 --s; 8903 } 8904 8905 /* Check for "**" between "s" and "e". */ 8906 for (p = s; p < e; ++p) 8907 if (p[0] == '*' && p[1] == '*') 8908 starstar = TRUE; 8909 8910 /* convert the file pattern to a regexp pattern */ 8911 starts_with_dot = (*s == '.'); 8912 pat = file_pat_to_reg_pat(s, e, NULL, FALSE); 8913 if (pat == NULL) 8914 { 8915 vim_free(buf); 8916 return 0; 8917 } 8918 8919 /* compile the regexp into a program */ 8920 #ifdef CASE_INSENSITIVE_FILENAME 8921 regmatch.rm_ic = TRUE; /* Behave like Terminal.app */ 8922 #else 8923 regmatch.rm_ic = FALSE; /* Don't ever ignore case */ 8924 #endif 8925 regmatch.regprog = vim_regcomp(pat, RE_MAGIC); 8926 vim_free(pat); 8927 8928 if (regmatch.regprog == NULL) 8929 { 8930 vim_free(buf); 8931 return 0; 8932 } 8933 8934 /* If "**" is by itself, this is the first time we encounter it and more 8935 * is following then find matches without any directory. */ 8936 if (!didstar && stardepth < 100 && starstar && e - s == 2 8937 && *path_end == '/') 8938 { 8939 STRCPY(s, path_end + 1); 8940 ++stardepth; 8941 (void)unix_expandpath(gap, buf, (int)(s - buf), flags, TRUE); 8942 --stardepth; 8943 } 8944 8945 /* open the directory for scanning */ 8946 *s = NUL; 8947 dirp = opendir(*buf == NUL ? "." : (char *)buf); 8948 8949 /* Find all matching entries */ 8950 if (dirp != NULL) 8951 { 8952 for (;;) 8953 { 8954 dp = readdir(dirp); 8955 if (dp == NULL) 8956 break; 8957 if ((dp->d_name[0] != '.' || starts_with_dot) 8958 && vim_regexec(®match, (char_u *)dp->d_name, (colnr_T)0)) 8959 { 8960 STRCPY(s, dp->d_name); 8961 len = STRLEN(buf); 8962 8963 if (starstar && stardepth < 100) 8964 { 8965 /* For "**" in the pattern first go deeper in the tree to 8966 * find matches. */ 8967 STRCPY(buf + len, "/**"); 8968 STRCPY(buf + len + 3, path_end); 8969 ++stardepth; 8970 (void)unix_expandpath(gap, buf, len + 1, flags, TRUE); 8971 --stardepth; 8972 } 8973 8974 STRCPY(buf + len, path_end); 8975 if (mch_has_exp_wildcard(path_end)) /* handle more wildcards */ 8976 { 8977 /* need to expand another component of the path */ 8978 /* remove backslashes for the remaining components only */ 8979 (void)unix_expandpath(gap, buf, len + 1, flags, FALSE); 8980 } 8981 else 8982 { 8983 /* no more wildcards, check if there is a match */ 8984 /* remove backslashes for the remaining components only */ 8985 if (*path_end != NUL) 8986 backslash_halve(buf + len + 1); 8987 if (mch_getperm(buf) >= 0) /* add existing file */ 8988 { 8989 #ifdef MACOS_CONVERT 8990 size_t precomp_len = STRLEN(buf)+1; 8991 char_u *precomp_buf = 8992 mac_precompose_path(buf, precomp_len, &precomp_len); 8993 8994 if (precomp_buf) 8995 { 8996 mch_memmove(buf, precomp_buf, precomp_len); 8997 vim_free(precomp_buf); 8998 } 8999 #endif 9000 addfile(gap, buf, flags); 9001 } 9002 } 9003 } 9004 } 9005 9006 closedir(dirp); 9007 } 9008 9009 vim_free(buf); 9010 vim_free(regmatch.regprog); 9011 9012 matches = gap->ga_len - start_len; 9013 if (matches > 0) 9014 qsort(((char_u **)gap->ga_data) + start_len, matches, 9015 sizeof(char_u *), pstrcmp); 9016 return matches; 9017 } 9018 #endif 9019 9020 /* 9021 * Generic wildcard expansion code. 9022 * 9023 * Characters in "pat" that should not be expanded must be preceded with a 9024 * backslash. E.g., "/path\ with\ spaces/my\*star*" 9025 * 9026 * Return FAIL when no single file was found. In this case "num_file" is not 9027 * set, and "file" may contain an error message. 9028 * Return OK when some files found. "num_file" is set to the number of 9029 * matches, "file" to the array of matches. Call FreeWild() later. 9030 */ 9031 int 9032 gen_expand_wildcards(num_pat, pat, num_file, file, flags) 9033 int num_pat; /* number of input patterns */ 9034 char_u **pat; /* array of input patterns */ 9035 int *num_file; /* resulting number of files */ 9036 char_u ***file; /* array of resulting files */ 9037 int flags; /* EW_* flags */ 9038 { 9039 int i; 9040 garray_T ga; 9041 char_u *p; 9042 static int recursive = FALSE; 9043 int add_pat; 9044 9045 /* 9046 * expand_env() is called to expand things like "~user". If this fails, 9047 * it calls ExpandOne(), which brings us back here. In this case, always 9048 * call the machine specific expansion function, if possible. Otherwise, 9049 * return FAIL. 9050 */ 9051 if (recursive) 9052 #ifdef SPECIAL_WILDCHAR 9053 return mch_expand_wildcards(num_pat, pat, num_file, file, flags); 9054 #else 9055 return FAIL; 9056 #endif 9057 9058 #ifdef SPECIAL_WILDCHAR 9059 /* 9060 * If there are any special wildcard characters which we cannot handle 9061 * here, call machine specific function for all the expansion. This 9062 * avoids starting the shell for each argument separately. 9063 * For `=expr` do use the internal function. 9064 */ 9065 for (i = 0; i < num_pat; i++) 9066 { 9067 if (vim_strpbrk(pat[i], (char_u *)SPECIAL_WILDCHAR) != NULL 9068 # ifdef VIM_BACKTICK 9069 && !(vim_backtick(pat[i]) && pat[i][1] == '=') 9070 # endif 9071 ) 9072 return mch_expand_wildcards(num_pat, pat, num_file, file, flags); 9073 } 9074 #endif 9075 9076 recursive = TRUE; 9077 9078 /* 9079 * The matching file names are stored in a growarray. Init it empty. 9080 */ 9081 ga_init2(&ga, (int)sizeof(char_u *), 30); 9082 9083 for (i = 0; i < num_pat; ++i) 9084 { 9085 add_pat = -1; 9086 p = pat[i]; 9087 9088 #ifdef VIM_BACKTICK 9089 if (vim_backtick(p)) 9090 add_pat = expand_backtick(&ga, p, flags); 9091 else 9092 #endif 9093 { 9094 /* 9095 * First expand environment variables, "~/" and "~user/". 9096 */ 9097 if (vim_strpbrk(p, (char_u *)"$~") != NULL) 9098 { 9099 p = expand_env_save(p); 9100 if (p == NULL) 9101 p = pat[i]; 9102 #ifdef UNIX 9103 /* 9104 * On Unix, if expand_env() can't expand an environment 9105 * variable, use the shell to do that. Discard previously 9106 * found file names and start all over again. 9107 */ 9108 else if (vim_strpbrk(p, (char_u *)"$~") != NULL) 9109 { 9110 vim_free(p); 9111 ga_clear(&ga); 9112 i = mch_expand_wildcards(num_pat, pat, num_file, file, 9113 flags); 9114 recursive = FALSE; 9115 return i; 9116 } 9117 #endif 9118 } 9119 9120 /* 9121 * If there are wildcards: Expand file names and add each match to 9122 * the list. If there is no match, and EW_NOTFOUND is given, add 9123 * the pattern. 9124 * If there are no wildcards: Add the file name if it exists or 9125 * when EW_NOTFOUND is given. 9126 */ 9127 if (mch_has_exp_wildcard(p)) 9128 add_pat = mch_expandpath(&ga, p, flags); 9129 } 9130 9131 if (add_pat == -1 || (add_pat == 0 && (flags & EW_NOTFOUND))) 9132 { 9133 char_u *t = backslash_halve_save(p); 9134 9135 #if defined(MACOS_CLASSIC) 9136 slash_to_colon(t); 9137 #endif 9138 /* When EW_NOTFOUND is used, always add files and dirs. Makes 9139 * "vim c:/" work. */ 9140 if (flags & EW_NOTFOUND) 9141 addfile(&ga, t, flags | EW_DIR | EW_FILE); 9142 else if (mch_getperm(t) >= 0) 9143 addfile(&ga, t, flags); 9144 vim_free(t); 9145 } 9146 9147 if (p != pat[i]) 9148 vim_free(p); 9149 } 9150 9151 *num_file = ga.ga_len; 9152 *file = (ga.ga_data != NULL) ? (char_u **)ga.ga_data : (char_u **)""; 9153 9154 recursive = FALSE; 9155 9156 return (ga.ga_data != NULL) ? OK : FAIL; 9157 } 9158 9159 # ifdef VIM_BACKTICK 9160 9161 /* 9162 * Return TRUE if we can expand this backtick thing here. 9163 */ 9164 static int 9165 vim_backtick(p) 9166 char_u *p; 9167 { 9168 return (*p == '`' && *(p + 1) != NUL && *(p + STRLEN(p) - 1) == '`'); 9169 } 9170 9171 /* 9172 * Expand an item in `backticks` by executing it as a command. 9173 * Currently only works when pat[] starts and ends with a `. 9174 * Returns number of file names found. 9175 */ 9176 static int 9177 expand_backtick(gap, pat, flags) 9178 garray_T *gap; 9179 char_u *pat; 9180 int flags; /* EW_* flags */ 9181 { 9182 char_u *p; 9183 char_u *cmd; 9184 char_u *buffer; 9185 int cnt = 0; 9186 int i; 9187 9188 /* Create the command: lop off the backticks. */ 9189 cmd = vim_strnsave(pat + 1, (int)STRLEN(pat) - 2); 9190 if (cmd == NULL) 9191 return 0; 9192 9193 #ifdef FEAT_EVAL 9194 if (*cmd == '=') /* `={expr}`: Expand expression */ 9195 buffer = eval_to_string(cmd + 1, &p, TRUE); 9196 else 9197 #endif 9198 buffer = get_cmd_output(cmd, NULL, 9199 (flags & EW_SILENT) ? SHELL_SILENT : 0); 9200 vim_free(cmd); 9201 if (buffer == NULL) 9202 return 0; 9203 9204 cmd = buffer; 9205 while (*cmd != NUL) 9206 { 9207 cmd = skipwhite(cmd); /* skip over white space */ 9208 p = cmd; 9209 while (*p != NUL && *p != '\r' && *p != '\n') /* skip over entry */ 9210 ++p; 9211 /* add an entry if it is not empty */ 9212 if (p > cmd) 9213 { 9214 i = *p; 9215 *p = NUL; 9216 addfile(gap, cmd, flags); 9217 *p = i; 9218 ++cnt; 9219 } 9220 cmd = p; 9221 while (*cmd != NUL && (*cmd == '\r' || *cmd == '\n')) 9222 ++cmd; 9223 } 9224 9225 vim_free(buffer); 9226 return cnt; 9227 } 9228 # endif /* VIM_BACKTICK */ 9229 9230 /* 9231 * Add a file to a file list. Accepted flags: 9232 * EW_DIR add directories 9233 * EW_FILE add files 9234 * EW_EXEC add executable files 9235 * EW_NOTFOUND add even when it doesn't exist 9236 * EW_ADDSLASH add slash after directory name 9237 */ 9238 void 9239 addfile(gap, f, flags) 9240 garray_T *gap; 9241 char_u *f; /* filename */ 9242 int flags; 9243 { 9244 char_u *p; 9245 int isdir; 9246 9247 /* if the file/dir doesn't exist, may not add it */ 9248 if (!(flags & EW_NOTFOUND) && mch_getperm(f) < 0) 9249 return; 9250 9251 #ifdef FNAME_ILLEGAL 9252 /* if the file/dir contains illegal characters, don't add it */ 9253 if (vim_strpbrk(f, (char_u *)FNAME_ILLEGAL) != NULL) 9254 return; 9255 #endif 9256 9257 isdir = mch_isdir(f); 9258 if ((isdir && !(flags & EW_DIR)) || (!isdir && !(flags & EW_FILE))) 9259 return; 9260 9261 /* If the file isn't executable, may not add it. Do accept directories. */ 9262 if (!isdir && (flags & EW_EXEC) && !mch_can_exe(f)) 9263 return; 9264 9265 /* Make room for another item in the file list. */ 9266 if (ga_grow(gap, 1) == FAIL) 9267 return; 9268 9269 p = alloc((unsigned)(STRLEN(f) + 1 + isdir)); 9270 if (p == NULL) 9271 return; 9272 9273 STRCPY(p, f); 9274 #ifdef BACKSLASH_IN_FILENAME 9275 slash_adjust(p); 9276 #endif 9277 /* 9278 * Append a slash or backslash after directory names if none is present. 9279 */ 9280 #ifndef DONT_ADD_PATHSEP_TO_DIR 9281 if (isdir && (flags & EW_ADDSLASH)) 9282 add_pathsep(p); 9283 #endif 9284 ((char_u **)gap->ga_data)[gap->ga_len++] = p; 9285 } 9286 #endif /* !NO_EXPANDPATH */ 9287 9288 #if defined(VIM_BACKTICK) || defined(FEAT_EVAL) || defined(PROTO) 9289 9290 #ifndef SEEK_SET 9291 # define SEEK_SET 0 9292 #endif 9293 #ifndef SEEK_END 9294 # define SEEK_END 2 9295 #endif 9296 9297 /* 9298 * Get the stdout of an external command. 9299 * Returns an allocated string, or NULL for error. 9300 */ 9301 char_u * 9302 get_cmd_output(cmd, infile, flags) 9303 char_u *cmd; 9304 char_u *infile; /* optional input file name */ 9305 int flags; /* can be SHELL_SILENT */ 9306 { 9307 char_u *tempname; 9308 char_u *command; 9309 char_u *buffer = NULL; 9310 int len; 9311 int i = 0; 9312 FILE *fd; 9313 9314 if (check_restricted() || check_secure()) 9315 return NULL; 9316 9317 /* get a name for the temp file */ 9318 if ((tempname = vim_tempname('o')) == NULL) 9319 { 9320 EMSG(_(e_notmp)); 9321 return NULL; 9322 } 9323 9324 /* Add the redirection stuff */ 9325 command = make_filter_cmd(cmd, infile, tempname); 9326 if (command == NULL) 9327 goto done; 9328 9329 /* 9330 * Call the shell to execute the command (errors are ignored). 9331 * Don't check timestamps here. 9332 */ 9333 ++no_check_timestamps; 9334 call_shell(command, SHELL_DOOUT | SHELL_EXPAND | flags); 9335 --no_check_timestamps; 9336 9337 vim_free(command); 9338 9339 /* 9340 * read the names from the file into memory 9341 */ 9342 # ifdef VMS 9343 /* created temporary file is not allways readable as binary */ 9344 fd = mch_fopen((char *)tempname, "r"); 9345 # else 9346 fd = mch_fopen((char *)tempname, READBIN); 9347 # endif 9348 9349 if (fd == NULL) 9350 { 9351 EMSG2(_(e_notopen), tempname); 9352 goto done; 9353 } 9354 9355 fseek(fd, 0L, SEEK_END); 9356 len = ftell(fd); /* get size of temp file */ 9357 fseek(fd, 0L, SEEK_SET); 9358 9359 buffer = alloc(len + 1); 9360 if (buffer != NULL) 9361 i = (int)fread((char *)buffer, (size_t)1, (size_t)len, fd); 9362 fclose(fd); 9363 mch_remove(tempname); 9364 if (buffer == NULL) 9365 goto done; 9366 #ifdef VMS 9367 len = i; /* VMS doesn't give us what we asked for... */ 9368 #endif 9369 if (i != len) 9370 { 9371 EMSG2(_(e_notread), tempname); 9372 vim_free(buffer); 9373 buffer = NULL; 9374 } 9375 else 9376 buffer[len] = '\0'; /* make sure the buffer is terminated */ 9377 9378 done: 9379 vim_free(tempname); 9380 return buffer; 9381 } 9382 #endif 9383 9384 /* 9385 * Free the list of files returned by expand_wildcards() or other expansion 9386 * functions. 9387 */ 9388 void 9389 FreeWild(count, files) 9390 int count; 9391 char_u **files; 9392 { 9393 if (count <= 0 || files == NULL) 9394 return; 9395 #if defined(__EMX__) && defined(__ALWAYS_HAS_TRAILING_NULL_POINTER) /* XXX */ 9396 /* 9397 * Is this still OK for when other functions than expand_wildcards() have 9398 * been used??? 9399 */ 9400 _fnexplodefree((char **)files); 9401 #else 9402 while (count--) 9403 vim_free(files[count]); 9404 vim_free(files); 9405 #endif 9406 } 9407 9408 /* 9409 * return TRUE when need to go to Insert mode because of 'insertmode'. 9410 * Don't do this when still processing a command or a mapping. 9411 * Don't do this when inside a ":normal" command. 9412 */ 9413 int 9414 goto_im() 9415 { 9416 return (p_im && stuff_empty() && typebuf_typed()); 9417 } 9418